PHILOSOPHICAL GREEK AN INTRODUCTION BY
FRANCIS H. FOBES Πάντες άνθρωποι του εΐδέναι ορέγονται φύσει 'Αριστοτέλης έν πρ...
375 downloads
2455 Views
17MB Size
Report
This content was uploaded by our users and we assume good faith they have the permission to share this book. If you own the copyright to this book and it is wrongfully on our website, we offer a simple DMCA procedure to remove your content from our site. Start by pressing the button below!
Report copyright / DMCA form
PHILOSOPHICAL GREEK AN INTRODUCTION BY
FRANCIS H. FOBES Πάντες άνθρωποι του εΐδέναι ορέγονται φύσει 'Αριστοτέλης έν πρώτω των Μετά τά Φυσικά g8oa2i . All men by nature desire to know
THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO
CHICAGO
ILLINOIS
PRESS
Library of Congress Catalog Number: 57-8580 T H E UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS, CHICAGO 3 7
Cambridge University Press, London, N.VV. 1, England The University of Toronto Press, Toronto 5, Canada Copyright under the International Copyright Union, 1957. All rights reserved. Published 1957. Second Impression 1959, Composed in the Netherlands by E . J . BRILL, Leiden. Printed by the UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS, Chicago,
Illinois,
UjS.A.
To HARRY
AUSTRYN
IVOLFSON
PREFACE T h e last t h i r t y or f o r t y years h a v e seen the publication of a number of books designed to introduce t h e beginner in Greek, not to
prose
narrative, b u t to some other kind of writing, Plato, for instance,
or
Homer, or even, as in the case of one of the best of these books, t o writing of several v e r y different kinds. T h e chief aim of the present book is t o acquaint the beginner w i t h technical philosophical terms and to give h i m practice in reading Greek t h a t deals w i t h philosophical ideas; the book is intended, however, not only for students of philosophy but also for students of linguistics, literary criticism, physics, biology, or of other disciplines in w h i c h t h e acquisition of a technical v o c a b u l a r y is of i m portance. T h e author holds out no promise of " G r e e k W i t h o u t
Tears".
He
has followed the old-fashioned order in his presentation of forms a n d of s y n t a x ; in the first t w e n t y - f o u r lessons the paradigms are given in the b o d y of the book as well as in the paradigm sections
(381-473)
at the b a c k . H e has not hesitated to m a n u f a c t u r e Greek forms for the paradigms (for a particularly flagrant instance see the forms of όρύττω in §§ 134-136) or, in the first part of the book, to concoct Greek sentences for translation into English, or t o repeat the time worn "beneficial l i e " about the sign of the first aorist a c t i v e (§ 86). He has not dodged technical g r a m m a t i c a l terms. He has not tried to m a k e the lessons of equal length. H e has not a l w a y s presented the material in the order in which the beginner should s t u d y i t ; in § § 3 1 - 3 2 , for instance, he has m a d e m a n y general statements about the Greek verb which serve little immediate purpose b u t which, as the student progresses, will f o r m a frame within w h i c h the parts of the v e r b m a y e v e n t u a l l y combine to constitute an intelligible picture. T h e Aristotelian passages do not purport to contain, in e v e r y case, the gist of their respective a r g u m e n t s ; t h e y are in p a r t little more t h a n drill material for the acquisition of the v o c a b u l a r y . A l t h o u g h t h e y h a v e been so chosen as to touch on m a n y of Aristotle's chief doctrines, t h e y are not intended as an abridged statement
of
Aristotelian philosophy. For the main idea of the book, and for help in selecting the Aristotelian passages, the author is indebted t o Professor H a r r y A u s t r y n W o l f s o n of H a r v a r d
U n i v e r s i t y ; in interpreting t h e passages the a u t h o r h a s
vii
PREFACE
Vlll
d r a w n freely upon Sir D a v i d Ross's editions of the Metaphysics Physics
and t h e
and upon the late R . D . Hicks's edition of the De Anima;
u p o n the S m i t h - R o s s translation of Aristotle into English.
also
Professor
F . S t u a r t Crawford of B o s t o n U n i v e r s i t y , Professor W e n d e l l V . Clausen of A m h e r s t
College, and Professor Benedict Einarson and Dr.
Eric
H a m p of the U n i v e r s i t y of Chicago h a v e been so k i n d as to go through the greater part of t h e book in manuscript and h a v e placed the a u t h o r under great obligation b y freeing the book f r o m numerous errors. author
is under
obligation
also to Professor
Thomas F .
The
Gould
A m h e r s t College, w h o has m a d e a n u m b e r of valuable suggestions. F. H. F. Amherst, Mass., October, 1955
of
CONTENTS Lesson
Sections
I.
i - 17
II.
18- 24
Page
I n t r o d u c t i o n : Letters, Syllables, A c c e n t s . T h e First Declension:
Oxytone
Feminine
T h e First Declension: O x y t o n e
Feminine
Nouns in α III.
25- 30
7
Nouns in η
ίο
IV.
3 1 - 39
Ω - V e r b s : Present Indicative A c t i v e . . .
V.
40- 47
T h e Second Declension: line, Feminine,
Oxytone
12
Mascu-
and Neuter Nouns and
Adjectives; Article.
.
17
VI.
48- 54
Ω - V e r b s : F u t u r e Indicative A c t i v e
VII.
5 5 - 59
T h e First Declension: P r o p a r o x y t o n e F e m i -
VIII.
60- 64
The
. . .
20
IX.
65- 68
The
nine Nouns First
23
Declension:
Paroxytone
and
Properispomenon Feminine Nouns . . . and
Second
1
Declension:
Paroxytone
25
Proparoxytone
Masculine,
Feminine, . .
27
X.
69- 74
0-\^erbs: Imperfect Indicative A c t i v e . .
and N e u t e r Nouns and A d j e c t i v e s
30
XI.
75- 78
T h e Second Declension:
Properispomenon
Masculine, Feminine, and N e u t e r Nouns and A d j e c t i v e s
33
XII.
79- 83
The, First Declension: Masculine Nouns .
35
XIII.
84- 91
Ω - V e r b s : Aorist Indicative A c t i v e . . . .
37
XIV.
92-103
Ω - V e r b s : Perfect and Pluperfect Indicative
XV.
104-110
Ω - V e r b s : S t e m s in λ, μ, ν, ρ
XVI.
HI-I20
T h e Third
Active
41 Declension:
4^
Nouns with Mute
Stems
49
XVII.
121-126
T h e T h i r d Declension: Nouns w i t h
Nasal
XVIII.
127-132
T h e T h i r d Declension: Nouns w i t h Vowel
or L i q u i d Stems or w i t h Stems in σ or D i p h t h o n g Stems ix
.
53 57
CONTENTS
χ Lesson
Sections
XIX.
133-144
Page
Ω-Verbs:
Indicative
of
Perfect
Middle
System XX.
145-154
60
Ω - V e r b s : Present, Imperfect, Future, and Aorist Indicative Middle and Passive
XXI.
155-162
Pronouns:
Intensive
and
.
Demonstrative
Pronouns
70
XXII.
163-169
Participles: A c t i v e Participles; εκών, ακων,
XXIII.
170-176
Participles: Middle and Passive Participles;
XXIV.
177-184
Pronouns:
πάς
.
74
Uses of the Participle Relative,
79
Interrogative,
Indefinite Pronouns; Enclitics; tive
and
Indica-
o f ειμί
84
XXV.
185-189
Ω - V e r b s : Indicative, Infinitives, and P a r t i -
XXVI.
190-193
Ω - V e r b s : Indicative, Infinitives, and P a r t i -
XXVII.
194-201
P r o n o u n s : Personal,
ciples of Verbs in άω
88
ciples of Verbs in έω and όω ciprocal
Pronouns;
90
R e f l e x i v e , and εις,
ουδείς,
Re-
μηδείς;
Double N e g a t i v e s XXVIII.
202-207
66
92
T h e Third Declension: A d j e c t i v e s of Third and
First
Declensions;
Adjectives
of
T h i r d Declension
95
XXIX.
208-219
Adjectives:
Comparison
of
Adjectives;
XXX.
220-226
Ω-Verbs: Subjunctive
101 104
F o r m a t i o n and Comparison of A d v e r b s .
97
XXXI.
227-231
Ω - V e r b s : S u b j u n c t i v e (Concl.)
XXXII.
232-237
Ω-Verbs: Optative
XXXIII.
238-242
Ω-Verbs: Optative
XXXIV.
243-247
Conditional Sentences; Numerals
XXXV.
248-253
Contract
XXXVI.
254-260
Ω-Verbs: Imperative
116
XXXVII.
261-265
M I - V e r b s : τίθημι
119
Nouns
107 (Concl.) . .·
and
109 . . . .
Adjectives;
112
Object
Clauses
114
XXXVIII.
266-269
M I - V e r b s : δίδωμι
122
XXXIX.
270-273
M I - V e r b s : ίστημι
124
XL.
274-277
M I - V e r b s : δείκνϋμι
XLI.
278-281
Irregular M I - V e r b s : ειμί, εΙμι, φημί
.
130
127
XLII.
282-285
Irregular M I - V e r b s : ίημι, κεΐμοα, κάθημαι.
132
. .
XI
CONTENTS Lesson
Sections
Page
XLIII.
286-297
Indirect Discourse and Indirect Questions; W h a t is " H a p p i n e s s " ? Ethica Nicomachea
XLIV.
298-302
T e m p o r a l Clauses: W h a t is " H a p p i n e s s " ?
XLV„
303-308
(Cont.), Ethica Nicomachea T h e I n f i n i t i v e ; W h a t is
X L VI.
309-314
i. i o 9 7 a i 3 - 2 4
XLVII.
XLVIII.
XLIX.
315-318
134 i. iog7a24~b6 "Happiness' 3 ?
138
(Cont.), Ethica Nicomachea 1. 10971^6-21 V e r b a l A d j e c t i v e s ; W h a t is " H a p p i n e s s " ? (Cont.), Ethica Nicomachea i. i097b22-34 Uses of t h e A c c u s a t i v e ; W h a t is " H a p p i ness"? (Concl.), Ethica Nicomachea i.
141 145
148
319-325
I097b34-i098ai2, I098ai5-i8 Uses of the G e n i t i v e ; A Teleological A p proach t o B i o l o g y , De Partibus Animalium i. 6 3 9 a i - n Uses of the D a t i v e ; A Teleological A p proach t o B i o l o g y (Cont.), De Partibus
150
326-333
Animalium L.
334-336
LI.
337 338
i. 639ai2-23
153
LIV.
339 340
A Teleological A p p r o a c h to B i o l o g y (Concl.), De Partibus Animalium i. 63ga23-64ob4 T h e Categories, Categoriae 4-5. i b 2 5 - 2 a i 9 T h e Predicables, Topica i. i03b7-35 . . . T h e Causes, Metaphysica Δ. 10:1^24-35 . Chance and Spontaneity, Physica ii. 195b
341
31-36, i g 6 b i o - i 9 7 a 2 i , 197^32-35 . . . Chance and Spontaneity (Concl.), Physica
163
LV. LVI. LVII.
342
ii. I97a36-b22, i g 8 a i - 4 Nature, Physica ii. I92b8~34
165 166
343
N a t u r e (Concl.), Physica
LVIII.
344
Change and Motion, Physica
345
Change, Physica v. 224a2i2-28, 224a30-b6, 2 2 4 b n - i 3 , 16-22
LII. LIII.
ii. I 9 3 a 9 - i 2 , 28-
31, I 9 3 b 6 - i 2
167 iii. 2 0 0 b i 2 - i 5 ,
2oob26-20ia8, 2 0 i a i 0 - i 5 LIX. LX. LXI.
Infinite,
156 160 161 162
Physica
iii.
168
346
The
347
2o6a25~29, 2o6a33-b27, 206b33~207ai0 . Place, Physica iv. 2o8bi-22, 27-29, 2oga222, 209a2g-bii, 209b2i-33, 2iob322iia6, 2iib5-2i2a6, 2i2ai4-2i . . . .
169
203b30-204a7, 170
172
CONTENTS
χπ Lesson
Sections
Page
LXII.
348
T h e V o i d , Physica
LXIII.
349
Time, Physica iv. 2iSbg-20, 2 1 9 a ! - 1 0 , 219b
iv. 213312-14,
15-19,
2 i 3 b 3 i - 3 4 , 214316-22, 2iyb20~2S
. . .
2-9,
220324-26,
22ia26-b7,
223a29-bi,
223b20-23
. . . . .
LXIV.
350
Continuity, Physica
LXV.
351
T h e Prime Mover, Physica
176
vi. 2 3 i a 2 i - b 2 0 viii.
. .
177 .
179
25ia8-2i,
23-27, 2 5 i b i o - i 3 , 19-28, 254b7-24, 257a 2 5 - 2 7 , 2 5 ^ 4 - 9 , 259a6-i3, 267^17-26 . LXVI.
352
T h e Soul, De Anima
ii. 4i2a3-b22,
.
180
413a
20-b4
183
L X V I I.
353
Charmides Desires a Cure for the Headache,
LXVIII.
354
Μενάνδρου Γνώμοα Μονόστιχοι
igo
355-380
Some Consonant Changes
193
381-398
Paradigms: Nouns
197
399-410
Paradigms: Adjectives
204
411-422
P a r a d i g m s : Participles
209
423
Paradigms:
213
424
Numerals
214
425
Article
216
Charmides
1533-1570 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cardinal N u m b e r s and ούδείς
185
426-435
P a r a d i g m s : Pronouns
217
436-473
P a r a d i g m s : Verbs
220
Verb Endings
249
Some Present Stems . .
251
474 475-479 480 481-489 490 491-506 507
Some N o u n S u f f i x e s
252
Conditional Sentences
253
V e r b s Introducing Indirect Discourse
. .
256
W o r d Lists
257
Some Correspondences in Mutes
263
Abbreviations
264
Greek-English Vocabulary
265
English-Greek V o c a b u l a r y
298
English I n d e x
315
Greek I n d e x
321
I.
INTRODUCTION
Letters,
Syllables,
Accents 'Αρχή δέ -rot ήμισυ παντός. Γνώμη αδέσποτος. Well begun is half done.
1. T h e Ionic Alphabet.
Attic
Greek, the language
spoken
by
the
A t h e n i a n s of the f i f t h and f o u r t h centuries B.C., w a s written during t h e f i f t h century in an alphabet t h a t failed
to
distinguish
marked differences of sound. This alphabet w a s officially
certain
supplanted
in 403 B . C . b y the Ionic alphabet of t w e n t y - f o u r capital letters. R a p i d writing of these letters led t o cursive forms, and eventually, in the n i n t h c e n t u r y of our era, to a minuscule b o o k h a n d from a late stage of w h i c h the present small letters h a v e developed. Form
Equivalent
Sound
Name
A
α
a
αλφα
alpha
Β
β
b
β-ητα.
aha bag
Δ
Τ δ
S ά
γάμμα δέλτα
beta gamma delta
Ε
ε
e
ε ψιλόν
epsilon zeta eta theta
adze (7)
iota kappa
bel^ve
Γ
Ζ
ζ
dz
ζήτα
Η
η
e
ήτα
Θ I
0
th
θήτα
ι
i
ιώτα
Κ
κ
κάππα
Α'
λ
k, c 1
Μ
μV
m n
Ν Ξ
nu ΧΪ 0 micron
wax
pi rh6 sigma
^>ick
X ο μικρόν
π
P r
πΐ ρώ
s
σίγμα
ς final
cap /amb
νυ
δ
Ρ
Σ
[at /tome] thm (6)
lambda mu
0
Ρ
[there] p r e y (2)
μΰ
λάμβδα
£
0 II
go or sing (6) dealt [layette] episode (2)
men now [.French mot] soft (2) row
signal
ιό
PHILOSOPHICAL
Form
Τ Y
.1
τ υ
φ X
φ
τ Ω
ψ ω
,
Name
t
ταυ
u>
ύ ψϊλόν ψϊ
y
ph ch
Χ
GREEK
Χ1 ψϊ ώ μέγα
Ps ό
Sound
/own
tau upsilon
French
phi chi
j~to/> Mnge] g r a ^ i c (6) \\\ke /ziml German Buc/i (6)
psi
gypsum ί'French encore] tone (2)
omega
u, German
ύ
2. The v o w e l s are α, ε, η, ι, ο, υ, ω. ε and ο are a l w a y s short; η and ω are a l w a y s long. F e w English-speaking scholars t r y to give to ε, η, ο, ω their ancient values, which are roughly indicated b y the bracketed words a b o v e ( i ) ; whereas in English the short e-sounds and short o-sounds are open, and the long e-sounds and long ο-sounds are closed, the opposite was the case in Greek. otj ι, υ are sometimes short and sometimes long. In this book small α, ι, υ, when t h e y are long, are marked α, Ζ, ϋ unless t h e y h a v e the c i r c u m flex accent (δί, Ζ, υ), w h i c h stands only on a syllable long b y nature (8). In three diphthongs (αυ, ευ, ηυ) υ w a s sounded like L a t i n u. 3. T h e diphthong s are: Example
Sound
Form
At, Ει,
αι. ει
aisle eight
Αίθήρ, αίθήρ Ειρήνη, ειρήνη
Οι, Υι
οι. υ'.
oil French
Οίστρος, οίστρος
Αυ Ευ
αυ ευ
on r eh'-oo
Αυρα, αΰρα Ευκλείδης, εύκλείδης
Ηυ Ου
ηυ ου
eh'-00 group
Ηΰρηκα, ηΰρηκα Μούσα, μοΰσα
Αι
α
a
ΓΆι,δης,
[α +
ι]
lui
"Αρπυι,αι, άρπυιαι
Ηι.
η
L7] ~Τ ι ]
η
-ε
θραξ,
[ω —(— ιΊ
ω
αδης θρ^ξ
Latin Form
aether Irene oestrus harpyiae aura Euclides eureka Musa Hades T h r a e x or T h r a x
Ή ι ώ ν , ήών Κληθρα, κληΟρα Ώιδή, ωδή Κωμωδία, κωμωδία
clatra ode comoedia
All diphthongs are long. In the last three ("improper
diphthongs")
the first v o w e l is itself long, and soon after the classical period
the
AN
INTRODUCTION
3
τ, ceased to be sounded; this ι is " a d s c r i p t " with capitals,
"subscript"
with small letters. 4 . A vowel or diphthong beginning a word always has a breathing: rough (r) if the v o w e l or diphthong is preceded b y the sound h, smooth (') if it is not. T h e breathing goes with the second letter of a proper diphthong and w i t h the first letter of an improper diphthong; it s t a n d s over a small letter and in front of a capital. Words beginning with υ, υ ι, or ρ always h a v e rough breathings. ήδονή
(hedone)
pleasure
Αί'μων
(Haimon)
Haemon
άγορα
(agora)
market
Αίσωπος
(Aisopos)
Aesop
ιδέα Ελληνικός Αθηναίος
(idea) form (Hellenikos)6Vee£ (Athenaios) Athenian
αίμα οάτία
(haima) (aitia)
blood cause
"Αιδης or αδης (Hades) ωδή or Ώ ι δ ή (ode) ΰλη (hyle)
Hades ode material
υιός ρυθμ.ός
son rhythm
(huios) (hrythmos)
5. T h e consonants of the classical period are shown in TABLE I, p. 4. T h e only consonants that can stand at the end of a word are ν, ρ, ς (including ξ and ψ); all other final consonants are dropped. 6. The mutes or stops (explosive sounds) form three classes [labial, palatal, dental), in which the explosion takes place at the hps, at the palate, at the teeth and tongue respectively. T h e y f o r m three orders [smooth or voiceless, middle or voiced, rough or aspirate); in the first of these the explosion is not accompanied b y vibration of the vocal chords, in the second it is, in the third it is not and is followed b y an h-sound (φ ."= π ' ; χ = κ ' ;
0 —-τ').
The values of 9, χ, θ in the classical period are indicated by bracketed words a b o v e (1); the later values (fricative) are generally adopted in the classroom. γ before κ, γ, χ, or ξ is nasal; cf. η in bank, lingo, anchor,
Manx.
7 . ζ, ξ, and ψ are double consonants; ζ was originally pronounced dz •or zd. 8. There are as m a n y s y l l a b l e s in a word as there are separate vowels or diphthongs. W h e n a word is divided into its syllables, a n y group of consonants
that
can
begin
a
word
is put
with a following vowel.:
PHILOSOPHICAL
GREEK
b
pi
Ρ Ο HH Ρί w PH
0) 'o >
(Π tv r/1 u cd Ο α
β
g I i-
Ϊ
> β
ο H C O H en < W hJ
PQ
Η
Ο W Η h Ο en Η
£ < £
Ο (Λ £ Ο ο
55
ο "Ό
-I
QJ ixp χ 'o
>
'ο E>
c/) ^
§ -s ο ί> ^
T3 υ Ί3 ε g
CCL rA
br
eo τ3
Κ PU,
C <υ
AN
INTRODUCTION
5'
όγδοος eighth, γι-γνώ-σκω I come to know, έ-θνος nation, κέ-κτη-μοα I have acquired, λί-μνη marshy lake, ά-πτε-σθοa to touch, έ-χΟές yesterday. B u t c o m pounds divide at the point of union: εΐσ-άγω I
introduce.
A syllable is long by nature if it contains a long v o w e l or a d i p h t h o n g : τΐ-μή honor, τρεις three; long by position
if it contains a short v o w e l
followed b y a double consonant (ζ, ξ, ψ) or b y t w o consonants (except a worthy,
m u t e followed b y a liquid or a nasal): ά-ξι-ος messenger,
άγ-γε-λος
field. B u t β, γ, δ before μ or ν, a n d
ά-γρός ( ^ or
decree.
generally before λ, " m a k e p o s i t i o n " : δόγ-μα
In a
com-
pound word whose first part ends w i t h a m u t e and whose second p a r t begins w i t h a liquid or nasal a n y t w o consonants m a k e position; cf. εκλείπει
(
)
he
abandons
with
!~κλεπτε
he
or
was
stealing. 9, T h e marks of a c c e n t are said to h a v e been i n v e n t e d b y Aristophanes of B y z a n t i u m
(ca. 200 B.C.) t o designate inflection or p i t c h ; the syl-
lables of most Greek words h a d strong differences of p i t c h and (probably) slight differences of stress. These marks were not regularly used, however, until m a n y centuries later, b y which time the language h a d become strongly stressed. In most classrooms, as in Modern Greek, the accented syllable is stressed and the inflection is disregarded. 1 0 . T h e acute accent ('), which stands only on one of the last t h r e e syllables of a word, indicated a high pitch: υπερβολή a throwing hyperbole.
beyond,
T h e grave accent ('), which stands only on the last syllable,
indicate/d a low p i t c h : υπερβολή ήν it was an hyperbole. T h e c i r c u m f l e x (~), which stands on!y on one of the last two syllables and only on a long v o w e l or a diphthong, indicated t h a t the syllable began on a high p i t c h a n d ended on a l o w : υπερβολής of an hyperbole.
Syllables on which no
accent is written h a d l o w p i t c h : υπερβολή w a s pronounced υπερβολή. Greek words are n a m e d according to their accent : o x y t o n e (όξύ-τονος sharp-toned)
(with acute on the
last syllable, the " u l t i m a " ) : paroxytone
θεά
goddess
αιτία
cause
θάλαττα
sea
θεας
of a goddess
(with acute on the n e x t to the last
syllable, the " p e n u l t " ) : proparoxytone
(with acute on the third syllable
from t h e end, the " a n t e p e n u l t " ) : perispomenon (περι-σπώμενον drawn around) circumflex on u l t i m a ) :
(with
ιό
PHILOSOPHICAL
properispomenon barytone
GREEK
(with circumflex on p e n u l t ) :
(βαρύ-τονος deep-toned)
πείρα
trial
(with no accent
on u l t i m a ) :
αιτία
cause
θάλαττα
sea
πείρα
trial
1 1 . T h e antepenult, if accented, takes the acute, as βασίλεια queen;
but
it can h a v e no accent if the ultima is long, as βασιλείας of a queen. 1 2 . If short, herald, takes δέλτα
the v o w e l of the penult is long and the v o w e l of the ultima is the penult, if accented, t a k e s the circumflex, as κήρυξ ( - - ) οικείος domestic; in all other cases the penult, if accented, the acute, as φύλαξ watcher, βασιλεία kingship, delta, άγγελο υ ( - - ) of a messenger.
1 3 . T h e ultima, if accented, t a k e s the acute if its vowel is short, as αδελφός brother, εξ six\ otherwise t h e acute or circumflex, as αρετή virtue, αρετής of virtue. T h e acute of an o x y t o n e w o r d is changed t o the g r a v e w h e n the word is followed immediately, i.e. without punctuation, b y another word (except an enclitic) in the same sentence, as άρετή φυσική natural virtue. 1 4 . In determining the accent final αι and final οι are counted as short except in the optative (31, 234) a n d in the a d v e r b οίκοι at home: βασίλειαι queens, βασίλειαι kingships, άγγελοι messengers, οίκοι houses, παύσαι may he check, ύγιαίνοι may he be healthy. 15. A proclitic
(προ-κλίνω lean forward)
is a monosyllable h a v i n g n o
accent and connected closely w i t h the following w o r d : ή άγορα the market. 1 6 . A n e n c l i t i c (έγ-κλίνω lean on) is a monosyllable or dissyllable c o n nected closely with the preceding w o r d and usually (179) losing its a c c e n t : άγορα τε L a t . forumque,
άγοραί τίνες some markets.
1 7 . T h e m a r k s of punctation are c o m m a (,), colon (•), period (.), interrogation m a r k (;).
II. T H E F I R S T D E C L E N S I O N Oxylone
Feminine
Nouns
(A-STEMS) in α
' Εν άρχη ήν ο λόγος. Έ κ του κατά Ίωάννην 'Αγίου Ευαγγελίου i. In the beginning was the Word.
ι.
1 8 . There are three declensions (a-stems, o-stems, stems in a consonant or in ι or υ); three numbers- (singular, dual, plural); five cases (nomin a t i v e , genitive, dative, accusative, v o c a t i v e ) . I n the dual of all d e clensions the a c c u s a t i v e and the v o c a t i v e are like the nominative, and the dative is like t h e g e n i t i v e ; in the plural of all declensions the v o c a t i v e is like the nominative. T h e dual, which is not c o m m o n l y used, indicates a pair: τώ όφθαλμώ the
eyes.
T h e genitive, dative, and accusative are called oblique cases. Of the ablative, instrumental, and locative cases few traces remain. Separation
is expressed b y the genitive. Instrument
and place where a r e
expressed b y the dative. L o c a t i v e s , as in L a t i n , are better treated as a d v e r b s : χαμαί on the ground, L a t .
humi.
19. T h e name of a living creature m a y b y its f o r m indicate the sex (ό λέων the lion, ή λέαινα the lioness),
or the sex m a y be indicated b y the
article only (ό βοΰς the ox, ή βοΰς the cow), or the sex m a y not be indicated either b y the form or b y the article (ή χελΐδών the swallow, whether male or f e m a l e ; ο αετός the eagle, w h e t h e r male or f e m a l e ) ; a name of this last sort is called
epicene.
N a m e s of rivers, winds, and months are generally masculine; names of countries, towns, islands, trees, qualities, and conditions are generally feminine. In the first declension most nouns are feminine, ending in α, η, or a ; t h e rest are masculine, ending in ας or ης; w h e n ε, ι, or ρ precedes, feminines generally end in α or α and masculines generally end in ας. 7
ιό
PHILOSOPHICAL
GREEK
2 0 . Feminines in α: goddess Sing.
θεα
N. G. D.
Οεας θεχ θ~άν θεα
A. Dual
V. N. Α.
Plur.
G. D . N. V.
άγορα άγοράς
stella stellae
στρατιά
άγορα άγοράν
stellam
άγορα
stella
stellae
στρατιά στρατιαΐν
άγορα
στρατιαί στρατιών
άγοραί αγορών
θεαΐς
στρατί αΐς
άγοραΐς
stellarum stellis
θεάς
στρατιάς
άγοράς
stellas
θεαΐν θεαί θεών
G. D. A.
στρατιά στρατιάς στρατιαν στρατιά
θεα
V.
market
army
άγοραΐν stellae
21. O x y t o n e s of the first and second declensions t a k e the c i r c u m f l e x in the genitive and dative of all numbers. F o r the genitive cf. the old L a t i n genitive in fater 22»
familids.
VOCABULARY
άγορα, ας, ή 1 [ a g o r a place.
2 ],
market,
market
γενεά, ας, ή [genealogy], race, birth.
διαφορά, ας, ή, RENTIA
C/I/FERENCE,
2
DIFFE-
.2
έχει, Ae, s&e, or it has. ϋ χ ο υ σ ι , they have. ή (nom. sing. f e m . of def. art. 3 ), THE. ή ν , he, she, «7, or there was (470). ή σ α ν , they or there were. θεά, ας, ή [ t h e o l o g y , D o r o t h e a ] , goddess.
23.
singular
(1) γενεαί,
γενεά, γενεαΐς.
(3) διαφοράς, διαφοράς, διαφοραΐς.
μ ε τ α φ ο ρ ά , ας, ή, iraHSFERENCE, m e t a phor, μ ι κ ρ ά , ας 4 [ m i c r o p h o n e ] , small, little, slight. νευρά, ας, ή [neuralgia, N E R V E ] , bowsiring. σ τ ρ α τ ι ά , ας, ή [ s t r a t e g y ] , a r m y , φορά,
ας, ή
[BEAR,
Lat,
FERO],
loco-
motion , movement, TRA Ν SLA Τ10. ώ (interj., w i t h v o c . ) , Ο (usually n o t t o be t r a n s l a t e d ) .
(2) μεταφοράν, μεταφοραΐν, μεταφορών. (4) στρατιών μικρών, μικράν νευράν.
ι . T h e g e n d e r of a n o u n is s h o w n b y p l a c i n g a f t e r it t h e art. 6 (masc.), ή (fern.), -or τό (neut.); see 425. 2. W o r d s in b o l d f a c e t y p e arc d e r i v e d f r o m t h e G r e e k . W o r d s m SMALL CAPITALS are either (like "bear 5 3 ) c o g n a t e w i t h t h e G r e e k or (like " d i f f e r e n c e " ) d e r i v e d f r o m L a t i n w o r d s c o g n a t e w i t h t h e G r e e k , i. e. t h e w o r d in s m a l l c a p i t a l s a n d t h e G r e e k w o r d are d e r i v e d f r o m a c o m m o n ancestor. W o r d s in ITALIC CAPITA LS are t e c h n i c a l L a t . e q u i v a l e n t s of G r e e k p h i l o s o p h i c a l t e r m s . 3. G r e e k h a s 110 indef. a r t . ; αγορά -= market or a market. 4. F i r s t declension f o r m s of a d j e c t i v e s are used t o m o d i f y o n l y f e m . nouns. A d j e c t i v e s m o d i f y i n g m a s c . or n e u t . n o u n s h a v e o t h e r forms, w h i c h will be g i v e n l a t e r (42).
AN
(5) ήσαν θεαί, ή ν άγορά. (8) ήσαν δ^αφοραί μϊκραί;
INTRODUCTION
9'
(6) έχουσι μικράν στρατί-άν; (9) ή άγορα μΐκρά ήν.
(7) ώ θεά, ώ θεαί, (ίο) φορα ήν.
(ΐΐ)
ήσαν γενεαί. 24. (ΐ2)
Of m o v e m e n t s , of a m o v e m e n t .
(14) H a s he a m a r k e t ? small
bowstrings.
small markets. (21) Ο goddess.
(13) H e has small
(15) H a v e t h e y bowstrings?
(17) W a s
there
a
difference?
(19) She was a goddess. (22) I t w a s a metaphor.
armies.
(16) There were (18) T h e y
have
(20) T h e motion w a s slight.
III. T H E F I R S T D E C L E N S I O N Oxytone
Feminine
Nouns
(A-STEMS) in η
Κακής άπ' άρχής γίγνεται τέλος κακόν. Εύρϊπίδου άπόσπασμα 32. A bad beginning makes a bad ending.
2 5 . If the n o m i n a t i v e singular ends in η (19), η is k e p t throughout
the
singular. 26. Feminines in η : s.
N. G.
D.
P.
a long life ζωή μακρά
plan βουλή βουλής βουλή βουλήν
ζωής
D. A.
ζωή ζωήν
μακρας μακρα μακράν
V.
βουλή
ζωή
μακρά
ζωα.
μακρά
N. Α . G. D .
V . βουλά βουλαΐν
N. V. G. D.
βουλαί βουλών β-ουλαϊς
A.
βούλας
ζωαΐν μακραΐν ζωα! ζωών
μακραί μακρών
ζωαΐς μακραΐς ζωάς μακράς
the
beautiful form
ή
καλή
μορφή
της
καλής καλή
μορφής μορφή
καλήν καλή
μορφήν μορφή
τώ τοΐν
καλα
μορφά
καλαΐν
μορφαΐν
αι τών
καλα! καλών
μορφαί μορφών
ταΐς
καλαΐς καλας
μορφαΐς
τη τήν
τας
μορφάς
2 7 . T h e article: is inflected in all three genders b u t has no v o c a t i v e (425) ή and cd are proclitic (15). In t h e dual the masculine forms τώ, τοΐν are used in place of the feminine. 28.
VOCABULARY
άγαθή, ής [ A g a t h a ] , good, brave. άρεχή, ής, ή, goodness, courage, VIRTUS. βουλή, ής, ή, plan, plot, senate.
δέ ( a d v e r s a t i v e c o n j . , p o s t p o s . 1 ) , and. ζ ω ή , ής, ή [ z o o l o g y ] , life.
but,
ι . A p o s t p o s i t i v e w o r d is a w o r d t h a t n e v e r s t a n d s first in a sentence or c l a u s e .
ro
AN
22'
INTRODUCTION
xod (copul. c o n j . ) , and; as a d v . , also, even; και. . . . καί, both . . . and. κ α κ ή , ής [ c a c o p h o n y ] , bad, cowardly. κακία, ας, ή, badness, cowardice, vice, κ α λ ή , ης [ c a l i s t h e n i c s ] , beautiful, noble, honorable·, καλώς ( a d v . ) , beautifully. μακρά, ας [macron, macrocosm], long. μορφή, ής, ή [morphology], form. Περσική, ης, Persian, πομπή, ής, ή [pomp], procession. •σκηνή, ής, ή [ s c e n e ] , tent, booth, stage. στολή, ής, ή, rofcg, dress, s t o l e .
τ ε (τ' or Ο5 in elision: 5°) [ L a t . -QUE] (copul. conj., encl.), and·, τε . . . και or τε και, both . . . and. τροπή, ής, ή [trope, heliotrope, trophy, L a t , t r o p a e u m , L a t e L a t . t r o p h a e u m ] , turn, rout. φυγή. ής, ή [FUGITIVE], flight, Lat. FUGA.
φωνή, ής, ή [telephone], sound, voice, speech. ψϋχή, ής, ή [psychology], soul, life,
AN1MA.
29. (i) μακρα ήν ή Περσική πομπή. (2) ή της θεας στολή καλή ήν. (3) αϊ δέ βουλαί, καλαι. ήσαν. (4) άγαθήν ψϋχήν έχει. (5) και κακή και μακρα ήν ή φυγή. (6) εχουσι φωνή ν και ψϋχήν; (7) ή Περσική τροπή κακή ήν. (8) αί θεαί. καλή ν β ουλή ν έχουσι. (9) τροπή ή ν της κακής στρατιας. (ίο) άγαθαί και καλαί ήσαν. ( ΐ ΐ ) ή δέ μορφή καλή ήν. (ΐ2) άρετήν εχει ή -στρατέ, (13) καλαί. δέ ήσαν αί. άρεταί. 30. (ΐ4) Of the virtues, for a life, to the form. for voices, of forms. beautiful. souls ? long.
(17) B u t
(15) Of
a
tent,
(16) T h e Persian robes were both long the
plan was bad.
(18) H a v e
(19) A n d it was a long and b r a v e life. (21) T h e flight was cowardly.
(23) There w a s a long motion.
they
and
brave
(20) T h e tents were
(22) It has both voice and form.
(24) W a s the race noble ?
1
ι . T h e first t w o e l e m e n t s in a direct q u e s t i o n in E n g l i s h are g e n e r a l l y t h e f i r s t t w o in Greek,
IV. Ω - V E R B S Present
Indicative
1
Active
Σκηνή πας ό βίος. Παλλάδα επίγραμμα προτρεπτικών ('Ανθολογία Παλατίνη x . 72). All the world's a stage.
31. T h e Greek v e r b has Three
Active Middle (indicating action on oneself, for oneself,
Voices:
F o u r Finite
Moods:
or on something belonging· to oneself) Passive Indicative S u b j u n c t i v e (220-223, 228) O p t a t i v e (232-234, 239) Imperative
Infinitives Participles Verbal Adjectives Seven
Tenses:
(309-311) Present: I instruct, I am instructing, or I keep
instructing
F u t u r e : I shall instruct
or I
will Primary
instruct P e r f e c t : I have
instructed
F u t u r e P e r f e c t (rare in active):
I
shall have died, i.e. I shall be dead I I m p e r f e c t : I instructed,
I was in-
structing, or I tried to instruct Aorist: I
instructed
P l u p e r f e c t : I had Three
Numbers:
Secondary
instructed
Singular: first, second, and third persons Dual: Plural:
second
and third persons
first, second, and third persons
1. Ω-vbs. are vbs. in which, the first pers. sing, of the pres. ind. act. ends in ω ; in M I - v b s . this form ends in μι, e.g. τίθημι put. 12
ΛΝ
INTRODUCTION
13
32. C o m m o n to all forms is the v e r b stem, which, t h o u g h sometimes changing, carries the permanent meaning. T o this stem m a y be added one or more prefixes and suffixes, which, singly or in combination, indicate in t h e finite moods, Person in the infinitives, Tense,
and Number,
Tense, Mood,
Voice;
Voice·,
in the participles, Case, Ν timber, Gender, in the verbal adjectives, Case, Number,
Tense,
Voice;
Gender,
Voice.
T h e prefixes are, in finite m o o d s : Augment, w h i c h occurs only in secondary tenses of t h e i n d i c a t i v e ; Reduplication,
w h i c h occurs only in the present, aorist, perfect, and
perfect middle systems (see TABLE II, p. 14). T h e suffixes are, in finite m o o d s : Tense
Sign;
Thematic
(or "Variable")
Vowel,
w h i c h is ο in the optative, elsewhere
ο or ω before suffixes beginning w i t h μ or ν, ε or η before suffixes beginning with other letters; Mood Sign Personal
(in optative only);
Endings.
Of these there are, in the indicative,
and optative, four sets: primary secondary
active, and secondary
active,
primary
middle and passive.
middle
subjunctive, and
passive,
In the i m p e r a t i v e
there are t w o sets: active and middle and passive. T h e first person plural perfect indicative active of παιδεύω is πε-παιδεύκα-μεν, w h i c h is m a d e u p of reduplication, verb stem, tense sign, and personal ending. T h e first person plural pluperfect indicative middle of παιδεύω is έ-πε-παιδεύ-μεθα, which is made up of augment, reduplication, v e r b istem, and personal ending. T h e first person plural f u t u r e o p t a t i v e middle of παιδεύω is παιδευ-σ-ο-ί-μεθα, which is made up of verb s t e m , tense sign, t h e m a t i c vowel, mood sign, and personal ending. T h e principal parts of a regular verb are: (1) First person singular present indicative active (2) First person singular f u t u r e indicative active (3) First person singular aorist indicative active (4) First person singular perfect indicative active (5) First person singular perfect indicative middle (6) First person singular aorist indicative passive. F r o m these six parts it is possible to derive all of the m a n y of forms.
hundreds
PHILOSOPHICAL
Μ
TABLE
GREEK
II
Tenses
Systems Active
Middle
Passive
ι . Present
Present Imperfect
Present
Present
Imperfect
Imperfect
2. F u t u r e
Future
Future
3. First Aorist
First Aorist
First Aorist
4. Second Aorist
Second Aorist
Second Aorist
5. First Perfect
First P e r f e c t First Pluperfect Second P e r f e c t
6. Second Perfect
Second fect
Pluper-
7. Perfect Middle
Perfect
Perfect
Pluperfect
Pluperfect
F u t u r e Perfect
Future Perfect First Aorist
8. First Passive
First F u t u r e Second Aorist
9. Second Passive
N u m b e r of tenses
Second F u t u r e
6
7
7
AN INTRODUCTION 26' Present
33.
Indicative Active: send
instruct S.
D. Ρ.
34.
I
παιδεύ-ω
tell
pursue
πέμπ-ω
διώκ-ω
φράζ-ω
2
παιδεύ-εις
πέμπ-εις
διώκ-εις
φράζ-εις
3
παιδεύ-ει
πέμπ-ει
διώκ-εί,
φράζ-ει
2
παιδεύ-ε-τον
πέμπ-ε-τον
διώκ-ε-τον
φράζ-ε-τον
3
παιδεύ-ε-τον
πέμπ-ε-τον
διώκ-ε-τον
φράζ-ε-τον
ι
παιδεύ-ο-μεν
πέμπ-ο-μεν
διώκ-ο-μεν
φράζ-ο-μεν
2
παιδεύ-ε-τε
πέμπ-ε-τε
διώκ-ε-τε
φράζ-ε-τε
3
παιδεύ-ουσι(ν)
π έ μ π - ο υ σ ι (ν)
διώκ-ουσι(ν)
φράζ-ουσι(ν
T h e t h e m a t i c v o w e l is h e r e
g i v e s t h e present
tense
stem
E /o.
T h i s a d d e d t o t h e v e r b s t e m παιδευ
παιδευε/ο. O n l y in t h e d u a l a n d in t h e f i r s t a n d
s e c o n d p e r s o n s p l u r a l of t h i s i n f l e c t i o n c a n t h e c o m p o n e n t stem, thematic
vowel, primary
active personal ending)
parts
(verb
be readily
dis-
t i n g u i s h e d . I n t h e t h i r d p e r s o n p l u r a l t h e e n d i n g w a s o r i g i n a l l y ντι
(cf.
L a t i n am-a-nt);
and
b e f o r e t h e f i n a l ι t h e τ s o f t e n e d t o σ (cf. nation);
before this σ the ν disappeared pensatory 35.
lengthening
com-
(371), leaving no trace except the
of ο t o ου. S e e
474.4.
T h e a c c e n t h e r e , a s i n m o s t v e r b f o r m s , i s recessive;
i. e. i t
recedes
f r o m e n d of t h e w o r d a s f a r a s t h e r u l e s of a c c e n t a l l o w ( 1 1 ) . 36. T h e
p r e s e n t i n f i n i t i v e a c t i v e is πα',δεύ-ειν, f o r m e d b y
a d d i n g εν
to
t h e p r e s e n t t e n s e s t e m π α ί δ ε υ ε ( 3 4 ) ; εε c o n t r a c t s t o ει. 37.
VOCABULARY
α ρ π ά ζ ω (477) [ h a r p y ] , seize, plunder. διώκω, pursue. εις [ e i s o d i c ] {procl. p r e p , ) , usr/o (with acc, — L a t . IN with. acc.). Iv [enclitic] (procl. prep.), TN (with d a t . = L a t . IN w i t h abl,). έξ before v o w e l , έκ before c o n s o n a n t [ e x o d u s , e c s t a s y ] (procl. p r e p . ) , out of (with gen. = L a t . i£X w i t h abl.). κελεύω, ord.er, command, urge (with acc. of pers. a n d inf.). μ ή (neg. p a r t i c l e ) , not (in p r o t a s e s of conditions, w i t h s u b j v . . w i t h i m p v . , a n d w i t h inf. e x c e p t in indir. disc,).
ού b e f o r e c o n s o n a n t , ούκ b e f o r e s m o o t h b r e a t h i n g , ούχ b e f o r e r o u g h b r e a t h ing, ού a t end of clause (neg. p a r t i c l e , procl.). not. ούτως before v o w e l , ουτω b e f o r e c o n s o n a n t (adv.), thus, so, as aforesaid. παιδεύω [ p e d a g o g u e ] , train, instruct. πέμπω [πομπή send. φράζω (φραδ-νω: 377, 477) [ p h r a s e ] , tell. φυλακή, ής, ή [ p r o p h y l a c t i c ] , garrison, guard. ώ δ ε (adv.), thus, as follows.
1. W h e n a v b . a n d a n o u n or a d j . of t h e f i r s t or second declension are d e r i v e d f r o m t h e s a m e r o o t (the v b . n o t b e i n g d e r i v e d f r o m t h e noun or adj.,. a n d the n o u n or a d j . n o t being d e r i v e d f r o m t h e v b . ) , a n e - s o u n d in t h e pres. of the v b . is f r e q u e n t l y p a r a l l e l e d b y t h e c o r r e s p o n d i n g ο-sound in t h e n o u n or a d j . : λ έ γ ω λόγος, λείπω λοιπός, σπεύδο) σπουδή.
PHILOSOPHICAL
ιό
38. (i) ού πέμπομεν τας νευράς.
GREEK
(2) φράζετον, φράζετε, ού φράζεις.
την δέ φυλακή ν κελεύουσι τας στολάς μή άρπάζειν. άγορα ού διώκει.
δεύε ιν;
(3)
(4) έν δε τή μΐκρα
(5) ούτως άρπάζουσι τάς Ιίερσικάς στολάς.
άγοράς διώκει τήν κακήν φυλακή v. και καλαί.
1
(6) έκ της
(j) έν ταΐς άγοραις ήσαν νευραί μακραί
(8) τάς δέ σκηνάς ώδε άρπάζομεν.
(9) ού κελεύεις ούτω παι-
(ίο) εις τήν άγοράν πέμπετε τήν άγαθήν φυλακή ν.
3 9 . ( ι ι ) W e r e there Persian dresses in the small m a r k e t ? send t h e bowstrings in the following w a y . g u a r d s out of the markets. into t h e Persian m a r k e t .
We the
(14) T h e y are not pursuing the garrisons (15) Is she not seizing the b e a u t i f u l r o b e s ?
(16) H a s the soul a voice and a f o r m ? for the goddess.
(12)
(13) I urge sending
{17) T h e y are sending robes
(18) B u t in t h e m a r k e t there w a s a Persian garrison.
{19) Is he not pursuing and plundering?
(20) H e is sending the robe
into the market. 1. A d e p e n d e n t v b . s t a n d s o r d i n a r i l y a t t h e e n d of i t s clause.
VIII. THE Oxytone
Masculine,
FIRST
Feminine,
DECLENSION (A-STEMS) and Neuter Nouns
and Adjectives;
Article
Μηδέν άγαν. Nothing in excess.
4 0 . Most nouns of the second declension are masculine
(ending
in
ος) or neuter (ending in ov); a few are feminine (ending in ος). 4 1 . Most a d j e c t i v e s of the second and first declensions end in ος (when m o d i f y i n g masculines), α (when m o d i f y i n g feminines), ov (when m o d i f y i n g neuters) if the ος is preceded b y ε, ι, o r p ; otherwise in ος, η, ov. Some, including most compounds, h a v e only t w o sets of endings, the feminine being like the masculine: βάρβαρος barbarian, βάρβαρος feminine, βάρβαρον neuter. the beautiful
42. 0
καλός
ποταμός
τοϋ τω
κάλου
ποταμού ποταμώ ποταμόν ποταμέ
τον
καλω καλόν καλέ
the long road
river ή
οδός
της
μακρά μακράς
όδου
servus servr
τ ϊί
μακρα
την
μακράν
όδώ όδόν
servo servum
μακρά
όδέ
serve
μακρά μακραΐν
όδώ όδοον
ambo
μακραί μακρών
οδοί
servi servoru:
μακραΐς
οδών όδοΐς
μακράς
οδούς
τώ καλώ τοΐν καλοΐν
ποταμώ ποταμοΐν
τοΐν
οι των
καλοί
ποταμοί
αί
καλών
ποταμών
τοις καλοΐς τούς καλούς
ποταμοΐς
των ταΐς
ποταμούς
τάς
the beautiful
drink
τό τοϋ τω τό
καλόν
τώ
ποτόν ποτού
helium
καλόν
ποτώ ποτόν
bello bellum
καλόν
ποτόν
bellum
καλού καλω
belli
17
servis servos
PHILOSOPHICAL
ιό
GREEK
the beautiful
drink
τώ χαλώ τοΐν καλοΐν
ποτώ ποτοΐν
τά
ποτά ποτών
belia
ποτοΐς ποτά
bellls
τών
καλά καλών
τοις καλοΐς καλά τά
bell5rum bella narrow
small μικρός μικρού μ,ΐκρώ μικρόν
μικρά
μικρόν
στενός
μΐκράς μΐκρα
μικρού μΐκρώ
στενού
μικράν
μικρόν μικρόν
μικρέ
μικρά
μΐκρώ
μΐκρα
στενή στενής
στενόν
στενόν
στενή στενήν
στενώ στενόν
στενέ
στενή
στενόν
στενώ στενοΐν
στενά
στενώ
στεναΐν
στενόϊν
στενοί
στεναί
στενά στενών
στενώ
μϊκροΐν
μϊκραΐν
μΐκρώ μικροίν
μίκροί μικρών
μΐκραί μικρών
μικρά μικρών
στενών
στενών
μϊκροΐς
μϊκραΐς μΐκράς
μΐκροΐς
στενοΐς
μικρά
στενούς
στεναϊς στενάς
μικρούς
στενού
στενοΐς στενά
43. ο and οί, like ή and αί, are proclitic (15) . In all neuter words (whether of the second or of the third declension) t h e nominative, accusative, and v o c a t i v e are the same in the singular, the same in t h e dual, and the same in the plural. F o r the accent of the genitive and d a t i v e see 21. 44. A d j e c t i v e s , adverbs, prepositional phrases, and possessive genitives, when t h e y directly m o d i f y a noun t h a t has an article, stand ordinarily in an a t t r i b u t i v e position (i.e., the modifier i m m e d i a t e l y follows t h e article). T h e first a t t r i b u t i v e position is the normal one: ή στενή οδός the narrow
road
αί τότε οδοί the roads of that time το εν τώ ποταμώ φυτόν the plant in the river ό του αδελφού αγρός the brother"s field οι τότε (sc. άνθρωποι) the men of that time If the noun has greater emphasis, the modifier stands in the second a t t r i b u t i v e position: ή οδός ή στενή the road, the narrow
one (I mean)
το φυτόν τό έν τώ ποταμώ the plant, the one in the river (I mean)
AN
INTRODUCTION
19'
R a r e l y , and when the modifier is added as an a f t e r t h o u g h t t o a n o u n that is at first envisaged as indefinite, the modifier stands in the third a t t r i b u t i v e position: φυτά τά έν τοις άγροΐς plants, I mean the plants in the fields A n y other position is called predicate position: έν τοις άγροΐς τά φυτά the plants are in the fields ή οδός στενή the road is
narrow
τά καλά των φυτών (partit. gen.) plants that are beautiful τό φυτόν μου (poss. gen. of personal pron.) my plant (194} oi άγροί αύτου· (poss. gen. of personal pron.) his fields (155.3) 45.
VOCABULARY
<£γρός, οΰ, 0 [AGRiculture, ACRE], field, country (as o p p o s e d t o c i t y ) , L a t . AGER, άγριος, δ, ov [άγρός], living in the fields, wild., L a t . AGRESTIS. Α δ ε λ φ ό ς , οΰ, 6 [ P h i l a d e l p h i a ] , brother. (Voc. sing, αδελφε.) ά θ ρ ο ί ζ ω (477), collect (trans.}. α ρ ι θ μ ό ς , οΰ, ό [ a r i t h m e t i c ] , number. βεός, οΰ, ό, ή, god, goddess. ( N o m . sing. used f o r v o c . sing.) ό, ή, τό (article), THE. H a d o r i g i n a l l y d e m . force, w h i c h it r e t a i n e d in cert a i n phrases, e.g. ό μεν . . . 6 δέ the one . . . the other, οί μεν . . . οί δέ some . . . others, ό μεν . . . ή δέ he .. . she,
δ δέ and he. U s e d as a w e a k poss. in cases w h e r e it is p l a i n w h o t h e p o s sessor is: πέμπει τον άδελφόν he sends his brother. O f t e n generic: τά φυτά plants. οδός, οΰ, ή [ e x o d u s , m e t h o d , p e r i o d ] , road, journey. ποταμός, οΰ, ό [Mesopotamia], river. σ τ ε ν ό ς , ή. όν [ s t e n o g r a p h y ] , narrow. τ ό τ ε (dem. p r o n o m . a d v . ) , at that time, then ( a l w a y s t e m p o r a l ) , τ ρ έ π ω [τροπή], turn (trans.). φ α ν ε ρ ό ς , ά, όν [ p h a n e r o g a m ] , visible, evident. φ υ τ ό ν , οΰ, τό [ n e o p h y t e ] , plant.
4 6 . ( ι ) έν τοις άγροϊς άθροίζουσιν οί άδελφοί στρατιάν. (2) ό δέ Περσικός 6εός φανερός ουκ ήν. αριθμοί.
(3) μικρόν ήν τό έν τω άγρω φυτόν.
(5) ή έκ των άγρών οδός μακρα ήν.-
άδελφοΰ εις τους άγρούς τρέπει. τά έν τω ποταμφ φυτά φανερά; παταμόν τρέπειν.
(4) μικροί οί
(6) τήν στρατιαν τήν του
(7) τά δέ τότε φυτά μϊκρά ήν.
1
(8) ήν
(g) κελεύει τον άδελφόν τήν στρατιαν εις τον
(ίο) τότε δέ φανεροί ήσαν οί έκ της φυλακής άδελφοί.
4 7 . ( ι ι ) T h e brothers are collecting plants in the fields. (12) W a s not the river narrow ? (13) W a s the n u m b e r small ? (14) T h e gods and goddesses were not visible (masc.). (15) T h e brothers' field w a s small and narrow. (16) A t t h a t time there was a procession in t h e road. (17) Is not y o u r brother turning the procession out of the road ? (18) T h e n the Persian tents were visible. (19) A r e y o u collecting plants ? (20) T h e life of the plants w a s long. 1. N e u t . plur. s u b j e c t s , h a v i n g once h a d c o l l e c t i v c m e a n i n g , t a k e sing, v e r b s .
VI.
Future
Ω-VERBS
Indicative
Active
'Έργον εστί σπουδαίο ν είναι. 'Αριστοτέλης έν τ φ δευτέρω των Νΐκομαχείων 11093.24It is no easy task to be good.
4 8 . (i) In v e r b s whose stems end in a diphthong, a l o n g v o w e l , or a mute
(TABLE I, p. 4) the f u t u r e i n d i c a t i v e a c t i v e is m a d e u p of v e r b
stem, tense sign (σ), t h e m a t i c v o w e l (E/o), a n d p r i m a r y a c t i v e personal endings (474): παιδευ-σ-ο-μεν, πεμπ-σ-ο-μεν, διωκ-σ-ο-μεν,
φραδ-σ-ο-μεν.
παιδευσ*/ο is called t h e future tense stem. F o r the effect of σ on a preceding m u t e see 358-360. instruct
pursue
send
παιδεύ-σ-ω
πέμψ-ω
διώξ-ω
tell φρά-σ-ω
παιδεύ-σ-εις
πέμψ-εις
διώξ-εις
φρά-σ-εις
παιδεύ-σ-ει
πέμψ-ει
διώξ-ει
φρά-σ-ει
παιδεύ-σ-ε-τον
πέμψ-ε-τον
διώξ-ε-τον
φρά-σ-ε-τον
παιδεύ-σ-ε-τον
πέμψ-ε-τον
διώξ-ε-τον
φρά-σ-ε-τον
παιδεύ-σ-ο-μεν
πέμψ-ο-μεν
δί.ώξ-0-μεν
φρά-σ-ο-μεν
παιδεύ-σ-ε-τε
πέμψ-ε-τε
διώξ-ε-τε
φρά-σ-ε-τε
παιδεύ-σ-ουσιίν)
πέμψ-ουσι(ν)
διώξ-ουσι(ν)
φρά-σ-ουσι(ν)
(2) In some v e r b s t h e σ of t h e f u t u r e is dropped b e t w e e n v o w e l s , and the v o w e l s are c o n t r a c t e d : έλαύνω (έλα)
drive
έλα-σ-ω
έλώ
καλέ ω (καλε)
call
καλε-σ-ω
καλώ
T h e resulting f u t u r e is inflected like the present of a c o n t r a c t v e r b in άω or έω (185, 452, 454). (3) Certain other v e r b s a d d the tense sign σε (not σ), and, t h e σ remaining, t h e v o w e l s are c o n t r a c t e d : πλέω (πλε-F: 129.3)
sail
πλεF-σε-o-μα^.
πλευσοΰμαι
(4) V e r b s of more t h a n t w o syllables in ίζω h a v e f u t u r e s -in ιέ ω, t h e last t w o v o w e l s being c o n t r a c t e d : κιθαρίζω play
the cithara
κιθαρι-εω
20
κιθαριώ
AN
INTRODUCTION
21'
4 9 . The future infinitive active is formed b y adding εν to the f u t u r e tense s t e m : παιδευ-σ-ε-εν gives παιδεύσεων to be about to instruct; ε_εν
πεμπ-σ-
gives πέμψε LV ; διωκ-σ-ε-εν gives διώξειν; φραδ-σ-ε-εν gives φράσειν.
50. Elision. A short vowel m a y sometimes be elided w h e n the n e x t w o r d begins w i t h a vowel.
Oxytone
prepositions and
conjunctions,
also τινά (178) and ποτέ (152), lose their accent w i t h the elided v o w e l : έπ' άδελφόν against a brother, αλλ' ειπεν (άλλά είπε ν) but he said, τίς ποτ' ανθρώπων (τις ποτε ανθρώπων) who, pray, of men, οΰτε ποτ' είς nor ever into. Other o x y t o n e s t h r o w the acute b a c k on the p e n u l t : φήμ' εγώ (φημί εγώ) I say, πόλλ' επαθον (πολλά έπαθον) much did I suffer. A smooth m u t e is roughened before a rough breathing: άφ' όδοϋ (άπο όδοΰ) from a road. οτι, περί, and πρό do not suffer elision. 5 1 . ν m o v a b l e . Most words ending in σι (including ξι and ψι), εστί is, Ύ\ει went, all third person singular pluperfects active (ending in ει), a n d all verbs of the third person singular ending in ε, m a y add ν m o v a b l e before a vowel or at the end of a sentence: πέμψουσιν άγγελον or άγγελον πέμψουσιν they will send a messenger. 52.
VOCABULARY
Από [ a p o l o g y , OFF, OF] (prep.), from (with gen.), α ρ χ ή , ής, ή [ a r c h e t y p e , m o n a r c h y ] , beginning, principle, rule, province. γ ρ ά φ ω , γράψω [ g r a p h i c ] , write, draw, paint. 'Ελληνικός, ή, όν, Hellenic, Greek. έπί (prep.), on, upon, in the case of (with g e n , ) ; on, besides, by, at (with d a t . ) ; upon, to, against (with acc.). Ι π ι σ τ ο λ ή , ής, ή, letter, epistle, κ λ έ π τ ω (κλεπ-νω: 477), κλέψω [cleptom a n i a c , LIFT, shopLiFTER], steal. λ έ γ ω , λέξω [ d i a l e c t ] , say (with acc. o r w i t h otl or ώ ς : 286-294); mention (with a c c . ) ; call (with d o u b l e acc.).
5 3 . (l) τγι φυλακή γράψομεν εφ' όδόν (5θ).
λείπω, λείψω [ e c l i p s e ] , leave (trans.), be missing (intrans.). λ ύ ω , λϋσω [ a n a l y s e , LOSE, L a t . LUG], LOOSE, break, destroy. ν υ ν (adv. a n d particle), NOW, at present,
as things
έπιστολήν.
(2) άπό
(3) καλή ήν ή αρχή της πομπής.
λήν Έλληνικήν; (5) λέγει οδν ότι κλέψουσιν. ληνικήν στρατιάν.
οί Οεοι ού κλέπτουσιν.
NUNC.
των
οδών,
έξ
όδοΰ,
(4) γράψει ό θεός έπιστο(6) νυν δέ λϋομεν τήν Έ λ -
(7) λείψουσιν ούν τας νευρδίς.
λακήν έπιστολας γράφειν;
are, L a t .
οτ& (conj.), that, because. (Does n o t s u f f e r elision.) ο ύ ν (inferential particle, postpos.), in fact, therefore, accordingly,; δέ ούν, at any rate. πείθω, πείσω, persuade (with. acc. or w i t h acc. a n d inf.). ποτόν, οΰ, το [ s y m p o s i u m , POTION], drink.
(9) τότε S' ούκ ήν ποτά.
(8) πείσεις δέ τήν φυ(ίο) λέγουσιν ούν 6τι
ιό
PHILOSOPHICAL
5 4 . ( n ) H a s he a province n o w ? steal. letter.
GREEK
(12) H e orders the garrison not t o
(13) A c c o r d i n g l y we shall urge writing (use infinitive) a long (14) H e says t h a t t h e y will write a letter.
t h a t t h e y h a v e a small province. not t o steal ?
(15) I shall say
(16) A r e y o u persuading t h e guard
(17) A t a n y rate t h e y s a y t h a t he has a large province.
(18) Does he say t h a t he is collecting plants ? the Persian letters.
(19) W e shall not s t e a l
(20) It w a s not a Greek drink.
VIII. THE FIRST DECLENSION (A-STEMS) Proparoxytone
Feminine
Nouns
Μέγας γάρ ό άγων, & ςπλε Γλαυκών, μέγας, ούχ οσος δοκεϊ. Πλάτωνος Πολιτείας x . 6o8b. For great is the issue, my dear Glaucon, aye, greater than doth appear,
55. In p r o p a r o x y t o n e feminine nouns of the first declension the nominative, accusative, and v o c a t i v e singular h a v e ά; if the ά is preceded b y ε, l, or p, the genitive and d a t i v e singular h a v e ά; otherwise, η. T h e accent of the n o m i n a t i v e singular of nouns and of adjectives must b e learned f r o m the dictionary. W h e r e a s t h e accent of verbs is recessive (35), t h e accent of most nouns is persistent, i. e. it s t a y s on the same syllable as in the n o m i n a t i v e singular so long as the q u a n t i t y of the ultima permits, and the accent of most adjectives stays on the same syllable as in the n o m i n a t i v e singular masculine so long as the q u a n t i t y of t h e ultima permits (11). In t h e genitive plural all first declension nouns h a v e ών, w h i c h is f r o m άων, originally asom, whence also L a t .
arum;
whereas in L a t i n the s b e t w e e n vowels became r, in Greek it was lost, άων (ίο) becoming ών w i t h circumflex (M = ~). queen βασίλεια βασιλείας
56.
sabre
sea
μάχαιρα
θάλαττα θαλάττης
βασιλεία
μαχαίρας μαχαίρα
βασίλειαν
μάχαιραν
Οαλάττη θάλατταν
βασίλεια
μάχαιρα
θάλαττα
βασιλεία βασιλείαιν
μαχαίρα
θαλάττα
μαχαίραιν
θαλάτταιν
βασίλειαι βασιλειών
μάχαιραι μαχαιρών
θάλατται θαλαττών
βασιλείαις βασιλείας
μαχαίραις
θαλάτταις θαλάττας
μαχαίρας
T h e dative w i t h t h e v e r b to be, or w i t h similar verbs, m a y d e n o t e
the possessor: τη βασιλεία ήν μάχαιρα the queen had a sabre. In this c o n " 23
ιό
PHILOSOPHICAL
GREEK
struc.tion t h e emphasis is generally on the f a c t of possession,
whereas
a predicate genitive of possession emphasises the possessor: της βασιλείας ήν ή μάχαιρα the sabre belonged to the queen. 57.
VOCABULARY
δ γ ω , άξω [pedagogue], drive, lead, L a t . AGO. , •αλήθεια, ας, ή, truth; τ η άληΟεία, in truth, really. βασίλεια, ας, ή [basilica], queen. -ένέργεια, ας, ή [ e n e r g y ] , activity (as opposed to Suva μις potentiality), actualizaiion, actuality, ACTUS, ACTUALITAS. •ένταϋθα (dem. p r o n o m . a d v . ) , here, there. •έτι (adv. of t i m e a n d degree), yet, still, further. θάλαττα, ης, ή [thalassocracv], sea. μάχαιρα, ας, ή, sabre, knife. μέν (postpos. p a r t i c l e ) , on the one hand. O f t e n n o t t o be t r a n s l a t e d ; its f u n c -
t i o n is to c o n t r a s t t h e w o r d o r c l a u s e or sentence w i t h w h i c h it s t a n d s w i t h s o m e t h i n g t h a t is t o f o l l o w (with δέ). See 45. μετά (prep.)·, with, in company with (with g e n . ) ; behind, after (with acc.). I n c o m p o s i t i o n , sharing in or with, t i m e after, s e a r c h after, or c h a n g e from one place to another (as in μεταφορά a transference [of a w o r d ] from one application to another). π ο υ (interrog. p r o n o m . a d v . ) , where. σπεύδω, σπεύσω, hasten (trans, and intrans.). σύν [ s y n o d , s y m p a t h y ] (prep.), witht with the help of (with d a t . ) . ύγίεια, ας, ή [ h y g i e n e ] , health.
58. ( i ) ό μέν ένταϋθα ήν, ό δ' οΰ.
(2) ή δέ βασίλεια άξει τήν Περσικήν
στρατιαν.
(3) ό δέ τη αλήθεια θεός ήν.
(4) ενταύθα δ' ήν ή ένέργεια.
(5)
που ήσαν αί της φυλακής μάχαιραι; (6) μετά της βασιλείας ήσαν θεοί και θεαί. (7) λέγεις ούν οτι ύγίειαν εχουσιν.
(8) φορά μέν ήν, φωνή δ* οΰ.
καλή μέν ή
(ίο) τήν φυλακήν κελεύει ή βασίλεια
1
άρετή, καλή δ' ή ύγίεια.
(9)
μαχαίρας πέμπειν. 59. ( ι ι ) T h e gods c o m m a n d the queen to hasten. really plants in t h e sea? sabre.
(12) W e r e
there
(13) T h e Persian queen still has the small
(14) Some of the dresses were Greek and some were not.
T h e y say t h a t there w a s no road f r o m the river. t h a t she will hasten against the Greek a r m y .
(17) W i t h the help of
the gods t h e y will lead the a r m y a w a y f r o m the sea. w a s little a c t i v i t y here. a w a y f r o m the river. 1 . Generic.
(18) B u t there
(19) T h e gods c o m m a n d the queen n o t
pursue t h e Persian garrison.
(15)
(16) T h e queen s a y s
to
(20) T h e y are hastening w i t h the queen
VIII. THE FIRST DECLENSION (A-STEMS) Paroxytone
and Properispomenon
Feminine
Nouns
"Ανευ γάρ αρετής ού ρφδιον φέρειν έμμελώς τά ευτυχήματα. 'Αριστοτέλης έν τετάρτη Νϊκομαχείων
1124^30-31For without virtue it is not easy to bear gracefully the goods of fortune.
60. P a r o x y t o n e feminine nouns of t h e first declension m a y be divided into three groups: those ending in ά (ε, ι, or ρ preceding), those ending in η (some letter other t h a n ε, ι, or ρ preceding), and those ending in α (some letter other t h a n ε, ι, or ρ preceding). Those in ά and in η are inflected like θεά (20) and βουλή (26) respectively except for accent. Those in ά are inflected like θάλαττα (55) except for accent. Properispomenon feminine nouns of the first declension (ending in a) m a y be divided into t w o groups: those in which the α is preceded b y ε, l, or ρ and those in which the ά is preceded b y some other letter. Those of the first group are inflected like βασίλεια (55) except for accent. Those of the second group are inflected like θάλαττα (55) except for accent. T h e accent of the nominative singular m a y show the q u a n t i t y of a final α (as in πεΐρά trial, χώρα country) or it m a y not (as in δόξα opinion, ρίζα root): if the α of πεΐρά were long, the accent of the penult could not be circumflex (12); if t h e α of χωρά were short, the accent of the penult could not be acute (12); since ο is a l w a y s short, the acute is the o n l y possible accent for the penult of δόξα w h a t e v e r the q u a n t i t y of t h e ultima (10); if the t of ρίζα were long, the acute would show the α to be long (12); since the 1 is short, t h e accent shows nothing about the l e n g t h of the a. B u t when a final α is not preceded b y ε, ι, or p, it must be short, since a final ά is only found after ε, ι, or p. 61.
spectacle
force
country
battle
root
trial
Muse
θέα
βία
χώρα
θέας
βίας
χώρας
μάχη
ρίζα
πείρα
Μοΰσα
μάχης
ρίζης
πείρας
θέα
βία
χώρα
Μούσης
μάχη
ρ^ζη
πείρα
Μούση
θέάν
βίάν
χωράν
μάχην
θέά
βία
χώρα
ρίζαν
πει ρ αν
Μουσαν
ρίζα
πείρα
Μοϋσα
μάχη
25
ιό
PHILOSOPHICAL
GREEK
spectacle
force
country
θέα
βία
χώρα
μάχά
θέα&ν
βίαιν
χώρα ιν
μάχαιν
θέαι
βίαι
ρίζαι,
πεϊραι
Μουσαι
βιών
χώραι χωρών
μάχαι
θεών
μαχών
ριζών
πείρων
Μουσών
θέαις
βίαις
χώραις
μάχαις
ρίζαις
πείραις
Μούσαις
θέας
βίας
χώρας
μάχας
ρίζας
πείρας
Μούσας
62.
root
battle
trial
Muse
ρίζα
πείρα
Μούσα
ρίζαιν
πείρα ι ν
Μ ούσα ιν
VOCABULARY
άπο-λείπω,
απολείψω,
leave
by
έπεί. (temporal and causal conj.), when,
going
away from, abandon (trans.); cease (intrans.). βία, ας, ή, force; βία (dat. of manner as a d v . ) , by force,
since,
επειδή
violently.
γάρ (causal particle, postpos.), for. γνώμη, ης, ή [gnomic], opinion, pose, maxim, SENTENTIA.
δή (postpos. particle), i«
pur-
to be sure,
now.
6όξα, ης, ή [orthodox, paradox, doxology], opinion (what seems to be the case to the person spoken of), reputation (what seems to others to be the case with the person spoken of), expectation,
when, since, because. θέα, ας, ή [ t h e a t r e ] , spectacle, sight. κώμη, ης, ή, village. μάχη, ης, ή [μάχαφα, logomachy], battle. οίκίδ, ας, ή [economy, diocese, WICK [village), VICINITY], house.
παρά [parallel] (prep.), from the side of (with gen.); ai the side of {with dat.); to the side
of, along
by, beyond,
be-
sides, contrary to (with acc.}. πείρα, ας, ή [pirate, empirical], trial,
fame.
attempt, C^PERIENCE. £ίζα, ης, ή, root. χ ώ ρ α , ας, ή, country, space.
ci (2d sing. pres. ind. of ειμί), you are. £κ-λείπω, εκλείψω [eclipse], leave
because.
(temporal and causal conj.),
by
going out of, abandon. 6 3 . (ΐ) τότε δ' άπολείψουσι τάς οικίας. τήν
κώμην.
χώροϊν;
(β)
(2) βία γάρ πέμπε', την φυλακή ν εις
ή δέ γνώμη ήν καλή.
(4) εκλείψει ούν ή φυλακή τήν
(5) ή δόξα ή της "Ελληνικής φυλακής καλή ήν,
βασιλείας πέμψομεν τους αδελφούς. δόξαν αθροίζει
στρατιαν
(6) παρά της
(7) λέγεις οτι ή θέα καλή ήν;
ΙΙερσικήν.
(8) παρά
(g) έν τή κ ώ μ η ήσαν οϊκίαι
καλαί.
( ί ο ) αί έν τή χώρα οίκίαι καλαί ήσαν, 64. ( ι ι ) H a v e t h e p l a n t s l o n g r o o t s ?
(12) T h e garrison w a s a t
the
side of t h e q u e e n . (13) T h e garrison w a s small b u t t h e b a t t l e w a s l o n g (use μέν. . .δέ). (14) W h e n t h e b r o t h e r s w e r e in the v i l l a g e , there w a s a b e a u t i f u l sight. (15) Y o u will not steal, f o r y o u are good. (16) W i l l he s a y t h a t the a t t e m p t w a s n o b l e ? {17) T h e y will l e a v e t h e l e t t e r in t h e q u e e n ' s h o u s e . (18) T h e r e f o r e he is c o l l e c t i n g his (45) a r m y b y v i o l e n t m e a n s . {19) T h e c o u n t r y w a s s m a l l b u t b e a u t i f u l (use μέν. . .δέ). (2o) H e s a y s he will pursue the garrison a l o n g t h e river.
VIII. THE Proparoxytone
FIRST
and Paroxytone Nouns
DECLENSION (A-STEMS) Masculine, and
Feminine,
and
Neuter
Adjectives \Paov έρωταν ή άποκρΐνεσθαι. Πλάτωνος Πολιτείας i. 33^0. It is easier to ash questions than to answer them.
6 5 . P r o p a r o x y t o n e and p a r o x y t o n e nouns and adjectives of the second declension differ f r o m o x y t o n e s (40-43) in accent only ( r i ,
12,
14).
In the feminines of such adjectives the n o m i n a t i v e plural and genitive plural are accented like the masculine: άξιαι, αξίων. The feminine n o u n αξία worth w o u l d h a v e άξίαι, άξιων (55). messenger
inquiry
άγγελος (ό αγγέλου
μέθοδος (ή) μεθόδου
άγγέλω άγγελον
μεθόδω μέθοδον
άγγελε
horse,
drug
mare
φάρμακο ν (τό) ίππος (ό, ή) φαρμάκου ίππου ίππω φαρμάκω
child τέκνον τέκνου τέκνω τέκνον
μέθοδε
φάρμακον φάρμακον
ίππον ίππε
άγγέλω άγγέλο ιν
μεθόδω μεθόδοιν
φαρμάκω φαρμάκοιν
ίππω ίππο ιν
τέκνω
άγγελοι άγγέλων
μέθοδοι μεθόδων
φάρμακα φαρμάκων
ίπποι ίππων
τέκνα
άγγέλο ις αγγέλους
μεθόδοις μεθόδους
φαρμάκοις φάρμακα
ίπποις ίππους
τέκνον τέκνο ιν τέκνων τέκνοις τέκνα
worthy
young νέος νέου
νέα νέας
νέον νέου
νέφ νέον
νέα νέαν
νέω νέον
νέε
νέα
νέον
νέω νέοιν
νέα νέαιν
νέω νέοιν
άξία
άξιον
άξίας
άξιου
άξιε
άξίοί άξίάν άξία
άξίω άξιον άξιον
άξίω άξίοιν
αξία άξίαιν
άξίω άξίοι\
άξιος αξίου άξίω άξιον
27
ιό
PHILOSOPHICAL
GREEK worthy
young νέοι
νέα ι
νέα
άξιαι
άξιοι
άξια
νέων
νέων
νέων
αξίων
αξίων
άξίων
νέοις
νέαις
νέοις
άξίοις
άξίαις
άξίοις
νέους
νέας
νέα
άξιους
αξίας
άξια
friendly
topmost άκρος
άκρα
άκρον
φίλος
φίλη
φίλον
άκρου
άκράς
άκρου
φίλου
φίλης
φίλου
άκρφ
άκροί
άκρω
φίλίΟ
φίλη
φίλω
άκρον
άκράν
άκρον
φίλο ν
φίλη ν
φίλον
άκρε
άκρα
άκρον
φίλε
φίλη
φίλον
άκρω
άκρα
άκρω
φίλω
φίλα
φίλω
άκροιν
ά κ ρ α ιν
άκροιν
φίλοιν
φίλα ιν
φίλο ιν
άκροι
άκραι
άκρα
φίλοι
φίλαι
φίλα
άκρων
άκρων
άκρων
φίλων
φίλων
φίλων φίλοις φίλα
άκροις
άκραις
άκροις
φίλοις
φίλαις
άκρους
άκρας
άκρα
φίλους
φιλάς
VOCABULARY
66.
άγγελος, ου, ό [angel, evangel], messenger. άκρος, α, ov [ a c r o p o l i s ] , topmost, outermost, consummate (in a t t r i b . p o s i t i o n ) ; the top of (in p r e d . p o s i t i o n ) ; άκρον, ου, τό, height, summit, extreme, first or last term of a syllogism. άξιος, oi, ov [axiom], worth, worthy (abs. or w i t h gen. of m e a s u r e ) , έργον, ου, τό (earlier /έργον: 129.3), WORK, deed, function. ίππος, ου, ό [ h i p p o d r o m e , P h i l i p , L a t . EQUUS], horse·, ή, mare, cavalry. λίθος, ου, ό [ m o n o l i t h ] , stone. λόγος, ου, ό [λέγω, logic], sentence, discourse, story, reason, ratio, rule, rational principle, definition. (Any e x p l a n a t i o n or a c c o u n t t h a t c a n b e p u t i n t o w o r d s is a λόγος, a n d λόγος is also used of t h e w o r d s in w h i c h t h e e x p l a n a t i o n or a c c o u n t is p u t . ) 67.
(1)
ο
των
τέκνων
λ ί θ ο ι έν τ ω τ ό π ω ή σ α ν ;
άγγελος
μέθοδος, ου, ή [μετά + οδός, m e t h o d ] , a following after, pursuit of knowledgeT inquiry. νέος, α, ov, young, NEW, L a t . NOVUS. Βργανον, ου, τό [έργον, o r g a n ] , instrument. πιστεύω, πιστεύσω, trust (with d a t . ) , Lat.
ΪΊΒΟ.
πιστός,
ή,
όν
[πείθω],
trustworthy,
FAITH/M/.
τέκνον, ου, τό, child. τόπος, ου, ό [ t o p o g r a p h y , t o p i c ] , place, region (as o p p o s e d t o χώρα space). φάρμακον, ου, τό [pharmacy], drug, cure. φίλος, η, ov [ P h i l i p , Anglophile], friendly, dear·, φίλος, ου, ό, friend. φίλιος, α, ov (or ος, ov: 4 1 ) , friendly (as opposed t o w h a t b e l o n g s t o t h e e n e m y ; used esp. of countries).
πιστός
ήν
τοις
φίλοις.
(2) λ έ γ ε ι ς
δ' ό τ ι
(3) κ α λ ό ν μεν ή ν τ ό όργανον, κ α λ ό ν δέ τ ό έ'ργον.
AN INTRODUCTION
(4) φ ά ρ μ α κ α βασιλείας
νέα κ α ι
τέκνα
τοις
καλά
ττέμψομεν τ ο ι ς
άγγέλοις;
( 7 ) ή δ' ά κ ρ α χ ώ ρ α ουκ ή ν κ α λ ή . τ ά δέ έ ρ γ α (ίο)
68.
κακά.
οί έν τ ω τ ό π ω
29'
πιστοις.
(6) λ έ γ ο μ ε ν
οΰν
(5) π ι σ τ ε ύ σ ε ι οτι
ή
μέθοδος
ήν.
(8) τ ά μέν ό ρ γ α ν α τ ά τ ο υ τ έ κ ν ο υ κ α λ ά ή ν ,
1
ουκ άπολείψουσι τ ά
τέκνα.
will persuade t h e garrison to trust t h e messengers. mares were y o u n g and brave.
(12)
He
(13) H e says the
(14) B u t there w a s t r u t h in the messen-
(15) A c c o r d i n g l y t h e y s a y t h a t t h e y will not send the
stones out of the country. T h e deed w a s w o r t h y are writing their letters. horses.
της
(9) τ ο ι ς έν τ η κ ώ μ η φ ί λ ο ι ς λ ί θ ο υ ς κ α ι φ ά ρ μ α κ α π έ μ ψ ε ι ς ,
( ι ι ) T h e children in the village h a v e beautiful horses.
gers' words.
τά άξια
(16) T h e child has health and virtue.
of the instrument.
(18) N o w therefore
(19) I s a y t h a t he will, not steal the children's
(20) T h e horses in the procession did not belong
brothers. 1. The men in the place
(17) they
(44).
(56) to the
Χ. Imperfect
Ω-VERBS Indicative
Active
'Αεί. καλός πλους εσθ', δταν φεύγης κακά. Σοφοκλής Φιλοκτήτη Quit's always fair sailing when you're running away from trouble.
<69. AH s e c o n d a r y
tenses of t h e i n d i c a t i v e
(95) h a v e augment, w h i c h is syllabic
except
some
pluperfects
(a p r e f i x e d ε) in verbs b e g i n n i n g
w i t h a consonant (παιδεύω, έ-παίδευ-ο-ν) or temporal (a lengthening of the initial v o w e l or diphthong) in verbs beginning w i t h a v o w e l or w i t h a diphthong. V e r b s beginning w i t h p double the p after the syllabic a u g m e n t (ρίπτω, έ'-ρρΐπτ-ο-ν). In t e m p o r a l a u g m e n t becomes η becomes η becomes ι
αρπάζω
seize
έλαύνω ικετεύω
drive
becomes ω becomes ΰ
ορίζω υφαίνω
weave
αι becomes 7] α becomes 71 αυ becomes ηυ ευ becomes ηυ
αίρέω
take
(ηρε-ο-ν) ήρουν
άδω αΰξω
sing increase
p-o-v
ευρίσκω
find
ηΰξ-ο-ν ηΰρισκ-ο-ν
or remains
ευ οίκέω
dwell
εΰρισκ-ο-ν (ώκε-ο-ν) ωκουν
α ε ι ο υ
οι
becomes ω
ήρπαζ-0-ν ήλαυν-ο-ν
implore bound
ΐκέτευ-ο-ν ώριζ-ο-ν ϋφαιν-ο-ν
'
A v e r b beginning w i t h a long v o w e l or with ει or ου is not a u g m e n t e d .
1
T h e r e are no verbs beginning w i t h υι. Some v e r b s appear to h a v e b o t h syllabic a n d temporal a u g m e n t : όράω see, έ-ώρων; άλίσκομαι be takeny aorist έ-άλων. 7 0 . In v e r b s c o m p o u n d e d w i t h a preposition the a u g m e n t stands between, the preposition and the v e r b . B e f o r e ε all prepositions e x c e p t περί a n d προ. elide the final v o w e l (50), and έν, εξ, and σύν resume their p r o p e r ι . εικάζω portray
(ηκαζ-ο-ν) is the only exception. 30
AN INTRODUCTION 42'
forms if the) 7 h a v e b e e n c h a n g e d in the present: άπο-πέμπω send άπ-έπεμπον; περι-πατέω walk about, περι-επάτουν; προ-βαίνω step
off,
forward,
προ-έβαινον; έμ-βαίνω {ν before a π - m u t e b e c o m e s μ) step in, έν-έβαινον; έκ-λείπω (σ disappears b e t w e e n c o n s o n a n t s ; cf. L a t i n ecfero)
abandonf
έξ-έλειπον; συμ-πράττω help do, συν-έπραττον. E x c e p t i o n s to this rule a r e καθ-έζομαι sit down, έ-καθ-εζόμην; καθ-ίζω seat, έ-κάθ-ιζον; καθ-εύδω sleepy έ-κάΟ-ευδον. Some c o m p o u n d v e r b s h a v e double a u g m e n t : άμφισ-βητέω dispute,
ήμφ-εσβήτουν.
7 1 , T h e i m p e r f e c t indicative a c t i v e of παιδεύω is m a d e up of a u g m e n t (έ), present tense stem endings (474). instruct
(παιδευ 2 /ο: 34), and s e c o n d a r y a c t i v e personal
send
pursue
tell
έ-παίδευ-ο-ν
Ι-πεμπ-ο-ν
έ-δίωκ-ο-ν
έ-φραζ-ο-ν
έ-παίδευ-ε-ς
ε-πεμπ-ε-ς
έ-δίωκ-ε-ς
έ-φραζ-ε-ς
έ-παίδευ-ε(ν)
έ-πεμπ-ε (ν)
έ-δίωκ-ε(ν)
ε-φραζ-ε(ν)
έ-παιδεύ-ε-τον
έ-πέμπ-ε-τον
έ-διώκ-ε-τον
έ-φράζ-ε-τον
έ-παιδευ-έ-την
έ-πεμπ-έ-την
έ-διωκ-έ-την
έ-φραζ-έ-την
έ-παιδεύ-ο-μεν
έ-πέμπ-ο-μεν
έ-διώκ-ο-μεν
έ-φράζ-ο-μεν
έ-παιδεύ-ε-τε
έ-πέμπ-ε-τε
έ-διώκ-ε-τε
έ-παίδευ-ο-ν
ε-πεμπ-ο-ν
έ-δίωκ-ο-ν
έ-φράζ-ε-τε £-φραζ-ο-ν
72.
VOCABULARY
άνθρωπος, ου, ό, ή [anthropology, philanthropy], man, human being (as opposed t o god or b e a s t ) , L a t . homo . άνθρωπικός, ή, όν [άνθρωπος], human. άνθρώπινος, η, ον (or ος, ον), human. άπο-πέμπω, αποπέμψω, send, OFF, send away. βάρβαρος, ον (41), b a r b a r i a n , not Greek, foreign; β ά ρ β α ρ ο ς , ου, ό, b a r barian, foreigner. β α ρ β α ρ ι κ ό ς , ή, όν [βάρβαρος], b a r b a r i c , foreign. βασίλειον, ου, τό [βασίλεια], palace ( c o m m o n l y in plur. w i t h sing, m e a n ing)· δένδρον, ου, τό [ p h i l o d e n d r o n ] , tree. θύρα, ας, ή, DOOR; phir,, POOR with two wings, gate.
κωλύω, κωλύσω, hinder, prevent acc., or acc. a n d inf.). παύω, παύσω [pause, FEW], stop (trans.), πεδίον, ου, τό, plain. πόλεμος, ου, ό [polemic], war. π ο λ έ μ ι ο ς , α, ον (or ος, ον) [πόλεμος], hostile; οί πολέμιοι, the enemy. π ρ ά τ τ ω (πραγ-νω: 477); πράξω [ p r a c t i c e ] , do, fare. σ ο φ ί α , ας, ή [σοφός], wisdom, knowledge. σοφός, ή, όν [sophist, philosopher], wise, clever. σώζω (σω), σώσω [ c r e o s o t e ] , save, preserve. τέχνη, ης, ή [technical], art. φ ύ λ λ ο ν , ου, τό, leaf, L a t . FOLIUM (37^)-
ιό
PHILOSOPHICAL
7 3 (i) τότε δε πόλεμος ήν. κώμης άνθρωποι.
(2) τους βαρβάρους άπέπεμπον οί έκ
της
(3) άπεπέμπετε τούς συμμάχους άπό της χώρας.
(4)
τά δένδρα μικρά φύλλα έχει.
(5) σοφών δ' ανθρώπων (320.ΐ) ήν μή άπο-
πέμπειν τούς πιστούς συμμάχους. πεδίω δένδρα.
GREEK
(6) οί βάρβαροι ούκ έσωζαν τά έν τφ
(7) τοις συμμάχοις πιστοί ήσαν οί σοφοί.
βασιλείων μϊκραί ήσαν.
(8) αί θύραι των
(9) άνθρωποι μεν ήσαν, σοφοί δ' οΰ.
(ίο) κωλύσει
τούς έν τώ πεδίψ τούς 'ίππους παύειν. 7 4 . ( Ι Ϊ ) T h e art is long (44). horses.
(12) W e tried (31) to stop the barbarians'
(13) T h e m e n were barbarians b u t t h e y were wise.
barbarian has w i s d o m b u t he has n o t virtue (58.8). h a v e arts and virtues. queen. ful.
(16) T h e Persian allies were f a i t h f u l to their
(17) T h e y s a y t h a t the barbarian's palace was small but beauti-
(18) There were w a r s in the c o u n t r y
allies h a v e houses and palaces in t h e plain. leaves.
(14) T h e
(15) W i s e men
at t h a t time.
(19) T h e
(20) Trees h a v e roots and
XI. THE SECOND DECLENSION (O-STEMS) Proper
is f omenon
Masculine,
Feminine,
and Ν eider
Nouns
and
Adjectives
'Αναρχίας δέ μείζον ουκ έστιν κακόν. Σοφοκλέους 'Αντιγόνης 672. There is no evil worse than anarchy. 75. Properispomenon
nouns
differ from
(40-43),
oxytones
and
adjectives
paroxytones,
of
the
and
second
declension
proparoxytones
(65)
i n a c c e n t o n l y , σ ί τ ο ς is i r r e g u l a r i n t h a t t h e p l u r a l is n e u t e r . I n f e m i n i n e adjectives
the
genitive
plural
is
accented
like
the
masculine:
T h e f e m i n i n e n o u n θεία aunt w o u l d h a v e θειων. divine
grain σίτος
(ό)
σίτου
θειος
θεία
θείον
θείου
θείας
θείου
σίτω
θείφ
θεία
θείω
σϊτον
θείον
θείάν
θεϊον
σίτε
θειε
θεία
θείον
σίτω
θείω
θεία
θείω
σ ί τ ο ιν
θείοιν
θείαιν
θείοιν
σΐτα
θείοι
θεΐαι
θεια
σίτων
θείων
θείων
θείων
σίτοις
θείοις
θείαις
θείοις
σΐτα
θείους
θείας
θεία
island νήσος νήσου
evident (ή)
δώρον δώρου
(τό)
δήλος
δήλη
δήλον
δήλου
δήλης
δήλου
νήσω
δώρω
δήλω
δήλη
δήλω
νήσον
δώρον
δήλον
δήλην
δήλον
νήσε
δώρον
δήλε
δήλη
δήλον
νήσω
δώρω
δήλω
νήσο ιν
δώροιν
δήλο ιν 33
- δήλα δήλαιν
δήλω δήλο ιν
θείων.
ιό
PHILOSOPHICAL
island
GREEK
evident
gift
νήσοι
δώρα
νήσων
δώρων
δήλοι δήλων
δήλαι δήλων
δήλα δήλων
νήσοις
δώροις
δήλοις
δήλαις
δήλο ις
νήσους
δώρα
δήλους
δήλας
δήλα
76.
VOCABULARY
Αγοράζω (477)' άγοράσω [άγορά], buy. ανά [ a n a l y s i s ] (prep.), up, over, throughout (with a c c . ) ; in c o m p o s i t i o n , up, back, again. ά ν - ά γ ω (70), άνάξω, lead up, bring back. ά π - ά γ ω , άπάξω, lead away, lead back. αρα (inferential particle, postpos.), then, accordingly. δίκη, ης, ή [syndic], right, justice, deserts.
δίκαιος, cc, ov (or ος, ov) [δίκη], right, just. δώρον, ου, το, gift, bribe, L a t . DONUM. ζώον, ου, τό [zoology], animal, creature. θείος, κ, ov [θεός], divine. νήσος, ου, ή [Peloponnese], island. οίκος, ου, ό [οικία], house, dwelling. πλοϊον, ου, τό, π ρ ώ τ ο ς , η, ov, FIRST; πρώτον (acc. as adv.),
F I R S T , at
FIRST.
σίτος, ου, δ [ p a r a s i t e ] (plur. σΐτα, τά), grain, food.
7 7 . (i) άγοράσομεν έν τή φιλία νήσω πλοίο ν και ζώα. νέοιτά τών αγγέλων ζψα;
(3) ή μεν δίκη θεία, ή δέ άρετή ανθρωπινή.
λέγουσιν οί πρώτοι άγγελοι οτι σίτος έν τοις πλοίοις ουκ ήν. άρα τά δώρα τά καλά.
(6) δικαία μεν ήν, θεία δ' ου.
άγρούς άνήγομεν τά ζωα. 'ίππους
άγοράζουσιν.
(2) άπήγον οί (4)
(5) άπολείψομεν
(7) πρώτοι ανά τούς
(8) λέγει τά τέκνα δτι οί αδελφοί τούς πρώτους
(9) έν κώμη
μΐκρα ήν τά
βασίλεια,
(ίο) τη
δέ
βασιλεία τά βασίλεια οίκος ήν. 7 8 . ( ι ι ) There was a house on (έν) the small island. says there are stones in t h e boat. their gifts.
(14) T r u t h is a gift of the gods.
writing a letter to his brother. h a v e no horses. islands.
(15) A t present he is
(16) T h e people on the island (67.10)
(17) W e will persuade them to trust the people f r o m t h e
(18) T h e people f r o m the fields b o u g h t horses, and those f r o m
the village [bought] visible.
(12) T h e child
(13) A t first the children will abandon
1
boats.
(19) T h e horses in the field were
not
(20) V i r t u e is a gift of the gods.
i . I n t h e E n g l i s h - G r e e k sentences square b r a c k e t s are used either, as here, t o indicate a w o r d t h a t should n o t be t r a n s l a t e d i n t o G r e e k , or, as a t 2 3 1 . 1 9 , t o i n d i c a t e a w o r d t h a t E n g l i s h i d i o m does n o t require b u t t h a t G r e e k idiom does.
VIII. THE FIRST DECLENSION (A-STEMS) Masculine
Nouns "ΑνΘρωπον ζητώ. Διογένης. I am looking for a man.
7 9 . Masculine n o u n s of t h e first declension end in ας if ε, ι, or ρ p r e c e d e s ; o t h e r w i s e in ης (19). young
man
son of Atreus
citizen
poet
Persian
νεάνίάς
Άτρείδης
πολίτης
ποιητής
Πέρσης
nauta
νεάνίου
Άτρείδου
πολίτου
ποιητοΰ
Πέρσου
nautae
νεάνία
Άτρείδη
πολίτη
ποιητή
Πέρση
nautae
νεανίάν
Άτρείδην
ποιητήν
Πέρσην
nautam
νεάνία
Άτρείδη
πολίτην πολΐτα
ποιητά
Πέρσα
nauta
νεάνία
Άτρείδά
πολίτά
ποιητα
Πέρσα
νεανίαιν
Άτρείδαιν
πολίταιν
ποιηταΐν
Πέρσα ιν
νεανίαι
Άτρειδαι
πολΐται
ποιηταί
Πέρσαι
νεάνιών
'Ατρειδών
πολιτών
ποιητών
Περσών
nautarum
νεάνίαις
Άτρείδαις
πολίταις
ποιηταις
Πέρσαις
nautis
νεάνίάς
Άτρείδάς
πολίτάς
ποιητάς
Πέρσας
nautas
nautae
SO, T h e g e n i t i v e singular e n d i n g ου is b o r r o w e d f r o m the second d e clension. T h e v o w e l of t h e v o c a t i v e singular is g e n e r a l l y the s a m e as t h e v o w e l of t h e n o m i n a t i v e s i n g u l a r ; b u t α o c c u r s in n o u n s in της, in n a m e s i n d i c a t i n g n a t i o n a l i t y , a n d in c o m p o u n d s : πολΐτα, Πέρσα, παιδοτρίβά. 81.
VOCABULARY
Άτρείδης, ου, ό, son of Atreus. δεσπότης, ου, ό, master, lord, despot. (Voc. sing, δέσποτα.) «χω (σεχ), impf. είχον from £σεχον. εξω, have, (σεχ becomes έχ [3731; the rough breathing then changes to smooth just as a rough mute would change to a smooth mute; see 367. in the impf. σ disappears between vowels, and εε contracts to ει.) 35
ήδη (adv.), already. ϊσος, η, ov [isosceles], equal to, equal; ΐσως (adv.), equally, perhaps. κιθαρίζω (477), κιθαριώ (48.4), play the cithara. κιθαριστής, οϋ, ο, c i t h a r a player. κινδυνεύω, κινδυνεύσω (denominative vb., from κίνδυνος), face danger, risk (with cogn. acc. or with inf.). κίνδυνος, ου, 6, danger, risk.
ιό
PHILOSOPHICAL
μετ-έχω, μεθέξω, share in (with p a r t i t . gen.), (τ' is w r i t t e n Θ.) νεανί&ς, ου, 6 [νέος], young man. παιδοτρίβης, ου, ό [παιδεύω], gymnastic master, trainer. π α ί ω , παίσω [ a n a p a e s t ] , strike.
GREEK
παρασκευάζω (477) > παρασκευάσω, prepare, provide, render. Πέρσης, ου, ό, Persian, ποιητής, ου, ό, maker, poet, πολίτης, ου, ό [politics], citizen. σ τ ρ α τ ι ώ τ η ς , ου, ό [στρατιά], soldier.
82. (ΐ) τά του στρατιώτου δώρα τοις του Πέρσου ίσα ήν. κίνδϋνον κινδυνεύετε.
πολίτης μεν ήν άγαθός, κιθαριστής δέ κακός. και. πλοία;
(4)
(5) εϊχεν ό δεσπότης και σϊτον
(6) ή μεν των Περσών γνώμη καλή ήν, ή δέ τών 'Ατρειδών οΰ.
(7) ίσως δ' ούκ ήσαν λίθοι έν τφ τόπω. άγαθοί ήσαν.
(2) ού μικρόν
(3) ίσως δ' οί πολΐται στρατιώτας ούκ εχουσιν.
(8) οί δ' άρα κιθαρισταί πολΐται
(9) οί μεν νέοι μεθέξουσι τών κίνδυνων, οί δέ ποιηταί οΰ.
(ίο)
πείσομεν τον Πέρσην στρατιώτας επί τήν κώμην πέμπειν. 83. ( I I ) T h e y o u n g m a n w a s not master of the house. t h a t the citizens will share in the danger. do not strike the y o u n g men.
(14) T h e citizens will prepare gifts for
the poets b u t not for the cithara players. already h a v e horses.
(15) P e r h a p s the Persians
(16) D i d t h e y strike the small children ?
first t h e Greek soldiers h a d boats. and the g y m n a s t i c masters h a v e food. bringing b a c k their gifts. f r o m facing danger.
(12) H e s a y s
(13) T h e g y m n a s t i c masters
(18) P e r h a p s b o t h t h e
(17) A t soldiers
(19) T h e children are already
(20) H e says t h a t he will prevent the children
XIII. Ω-VERBS Aorist
Indicative
Active
'Ολίγοι £μφρονες πολλών αφρόνων φοβερώτεροι. Πλάτωνος Συμποσίου 194b· A few intelligent people are more formidable than many fools,
84. The aorist indicative expresses a simple past occurrence and implies nothing as to length of t i m e : έπαισα τόν δεσπότην I struck my
master
(a single act), έπαίδευσα τον δεσπότην I instructed my master (possibly a long process b u t regarded as a single act). In verbs denoting a state the aorist c o m m o n l y indicates entrance into the s t a t e : βασιλεύω I am king, έβασίλευσα I became king, εχω I have, εσχον (from stem σχ: 174) I got. 85. Some aorists active are w e a k or first aorists, some are strong or second aorists. T h e difference is one of formation, not of m e a n i n g ; b u t if a v e r b has b o t h a first aorist active a n d a second aorist active, t h e former is generally transitive and the latter intransitive, άπο-βάλλω {I throw off) has only a second aorist active άπ-έβαλον, which therefore is still transitive (I threw off); φϋω (I produce) has b o t h a first aorist a c t i v e £φϋσα and a second aorist active εφϋν; whereas, therefore, εφϋσα m e a n s I produced, εφϋν means I grew (intrans.). 86. T h e first aorist indicative a c t i v e is made up of augment, verb stem, first aorist tense sign (σα o r a 1 ) , and secondary active personal endings (474): έ-παιδεύ-σα-μεν (tense stem παίδευσα). T h e second aorist indicative active is ordinarily made u p of augment, verb stem, t h e m a t i c vowel (if the v e r b stem ends in a consonant), and secondary
active
personal endings: λείπω (λειπ, λοιπ, λιπ) I leave (transitive), ε-λιπ-ο-ν (tense stem λιπ ε /ο) I left (transitive). In the first aorist indicative a c t i v e the first person singular has no personal ending, and in the third person singular the final α of the tense stem is replaced b y ε. I n d o - E u r o p e a n roots which contain short e in some f o r m s often show short 0 in others and absence of e or 0 in others. (These alterations are ι. σ or — in the inf. act. and in the subjv. 37
ιό
PHILOSOPHICAL
GREEK
called " v o w e l g r a d a t i o n " , and one speaks of the e-grade,
the ο-grade
r
a n d the weak or zero grade of the root.) Hence the v o w e l changes in English strong verbs, e.g. sing, sang, sting. In Greek the e-grade shows ε, the ο-grade o, and the weak grade nothing, e.g. πετ, ποτ, π τ ; λειπ, λοιπ, λιπ; γεν, γον, γν or γα. W h e n in the weak grade in I n d o - E u r o p e a n an m or n could not be pronounced as a consonant, it b e c a m e vocalic (m, n, as in the second syllable of madam, hidden);
b u t these sounds b o t h b e c a m e α
in Greek. Most f r e q u e n t l y the e-grade is used in presents, and the weak grade in second aorists: λείπω, ελιπον; φεύγω, εφυγον; έχω, έ'σχον. ;pursue
instruct
send
έ--παίδευ-σα έ·-παίδευ-σα-ς
>/ ε-πεμψα ΐ·-πεμψα-ς
έ--παίδευ-σε(ν)
ε--πεμψε(ν)
>
ε·-παιδεύ-σα-τον ) ε--παιδευ-σά-την ε--παιδεύ-σα-μεν έ -παιδεύ-σα-τε >
ε--παίδευ-σα-ν
έ--δίωξα
> ε· -πέμψα-τον
ε--πεμψά-την ?
ε--πέμψα-μεν 5
ε·-πέμψα-τε ι -πεμψα-ν
έ--δίωξα-ς έ·-δίωξε (ν) ε--διώξα-τον έ--διωξά-την
tell ε--φρα-σα ν ε--φρα-σα-ς >/ ε· -φρα-σε(ν)
leave >/
Ε--λιπ-ο-ν
Ι--λιπ-ε-ς >/ ε--λιπ-ε(ν)
* ε -φρά-σα-τον ε -λίπ-ε-τον 5
έ--φρα-σά-την ε--λιπ-έ-την >
ε--διώξα-μεν ? ε--διώξα-τε
5
έ--φρά-σα-μεν ε--λίπ-ο-μεν έ--φρά-σα-τε έ·-λίπ-ε-τε
έ -δίωξα-ν
έ'·-φρα-σα-ν
>ί
ε--λιπ-ο-ν
8 7 . T h e aorist infinitive does not indicate past time except in indirect discourse. T h e first aorist infinitive active is f o r m e d b y substituting for the α of the aorist tense stem (86) the ending at (accent a l w a y s on the p e nult) : παιδεύω
έ-παίδευ-σα
αγοράζω
ήγόρα-σα
παιδεΰ-σ-αι άγορά-σ-αι
φαίνω
ε-φην-α
φήν-αι
T h e second aorist infinitive active (in t h e verbs w h i c h we h a v e studied so far) is formed b y adding εν t o the aorist tense stem (accent a l w a y s on the last syllable) : λείπω
έ'-λιπ-ο-ν
(λιπ-έ-εν)
λιπεϊν
88. T h e first three principal parts (32) of the verbs t h u s far studied are as follows:
AN INTRODUCTION αγοράζω άγω
( ϊ) ά
άθροίζω
39'
αγοράσω
ήγόρασα
άξω
ήγαγον
αθροίσω
ήθροισα
αρπάζω
(άρπαγ)
άρπάσω
ήρπασα
γράφω
(γραφ)
γράψω
έγραψα
διώκω
(διωκ)
Ιχω
(σεχ, σχ,
κελεύω
(κελευ)
διώξω σχη)
κιθαρίζο.) κινδυνεύω
(κινδϋνευ)
έξω or
(98)
έδίωξα σχήσω
έσχον
κελεύσω
έκέλευσα
κιθαρι-ώ
έκιθάρισα
κινδυνεύσω
έκινδϋνευσα
κλέπτω
(κλεπ)
κλέψω
έκλεψα.
κωλϋω
(κωλυ)
κωλϋσω
έκώλΰσα
λέγω
(λεγ)
λέξω
ελεξα
λείπω
(λειπ, λ ι π )
λείψω
ελιπον
λΰω
(λϋ)
λϋσω
έλυσα
παίω
(παι)
παίσω
επαι,σα
παρασκευάζω
παρασκευάσω
παρεσκεύασα
παύω
(παυ)
παύσω
έπαυσα
πείθω
(παθ)
πείσω
έπεισα
πέμπω
(πεμπ)
πέμψω
έπεμψα
πιστεύω
(πιστευ)
πιστεύσω
έπίστευσα
πράττω
(πράγ)
πράξω
έπραξα
σπεύδω
(σπευδ)
σπεύσω
έσπευσα
σώζω
(σω)
σώσω
έσωσα
τρέπω
(τρεπ)
τρέψω
έτρεψα
φράζω
(φραδ)
φράσω
εφρασα
89.
VOCABULARY
Αγγείο ν, ου, τό, receptacle, vessel. άλλος, η, ο [allopathy], other, another, ELSE,
Lat.
ALIUS;
with
art.,
TTE
other, the rest, ί/κ? res/ of the·, άλλος . . . άλλος, owe . . . another·, άλλως (adv.), otherwise, differently. αλλότριος, α, ον, belonging to another, ALIEN,
δέκα
strange,
Lat.
ALIENUS.
(indecl.) [decalogue], TEN,
Lat.
DECEM.
θηλος, η, ον, plain, evident. δούλος, ου, ό, slave. (indecl.), s i x , L a t . SEX. θΰμός, ου, ό, soul, heart, spirit. Ιατρεύω, ϊάτρευσα [ιατρός], cally, cure.
medi-
ιατρός, οΰ, ό [pediatrics, psychiatry],. healer, physician, surgeon. ξένος, ου, ό, stranger, guest, host, guest friend. οίνος, ου, ό, wine. περί [period, periscope] (prep.), ccmcerning, about (with gen.); round, «fcow/ (of persons, with dat.); round, « i o ^ (of place, person, or thing, with acc.). (Never suffers elision.) υιός (or ύος), ου, ό, SON. φοβερός, δ, όν [φοβος], fearfulτ terrible. φόβος, ου, ό [ h y d r o p h o b i a ] , fear,, terror.
ιό
90.
PHILOSOPHICAL
(ι)
ξένοι. δούλος
ά λ λ α δ' α γ γ ε ί α δ έ κ α ε ί χ ε ν (3) έν ά γ γ ε ί ω ουκ
ήν.
GREEK
(ζ)
ό δούλος,
μ ϊ κ ρ ω ήν ό τ ο υ ι α τ ρ ο ύ ο ί ν ο ς .
(5)
έν
τοις
Ι α τ ρ ο ί τ ό ν τ ο υ δούλου θ ϋ μ ό ν ;
άγροΐς (γ)
ήσαν
κώμαι
περί
δέ τ ο υ ο ί ν ο υ οΰ.
(4) εξ.
ήσαν
ο του ξένου
υιός
(6) ΐ α τ ρ ε υ σ α ν
οΐ
τ ό τ ε δέ φ ό β ο ς ήν τ ο ι ς έν τ ο ι ς ά γ ρ ο ΐ ς .
μ ε τ έ σ χ ο ν δέ κ α ι οί ξ έ ν ο ι τ ο υ ά λ λ ο τ ρ ί ο υ ο ί ν ο υ ; γομεν,
περί τούς ιατρούς
(ίο)
τοις
(g) π ε ρ ί μ ε ν τ ο ΰ σ ί τ ο υ
έν τ ή
ό δ ω φανεροί
ουκ
(8) έλέ-
ήσαν
οι
κιΟαρισταί.
91. ( ι ι ) It is evident t h a t (οτι) the slave is not going to steal the vessels. (12) T h e stranger's heart w a s brave, b u t the slave's [was] not. A r o u n d the son's house (acc.) there w a s a guard. letter to his son ? the fields.
(13)
(14) D i d he write a
(15) T h e y s a y t h a t t h e y chased the children out of
(16) H e (ό μεν) had six children and she [had] ten.
Persians bought grain; the others stole it. not get the other gifts.
(17) T h e
(18) T h e queen says she did
(19) T h e slaves led other guests into the house.
{20) It w a s not plain to the others t h a t he w a s talking about his guest friend.
XIV. Ω-VERBS Perfect
and Pluperfect
Indicative
Active
Ό Οεος και ή φύσις ούδέν μάτην ττοιοΰσιν. 'Αριστοτέλους ίίερί Ούρανου i. God and nature create nothing that has not its use. (J. L . Stocks.)
9 2 . T h e p e r f e c t tense d e n o t e s an a c t i o n t h a t h a s b e e n c o m p l e t e d ; t h e p l u p e r f e c t , an a c t i o n t h a t , a t some p a s t t i m e , h a d b e e n c o m p l e t e d . I n b o t h p e r f e c t a n d p l u p e r f e c t t h e e m p h a s i s is g e n e r a l l y n o t so m u c h on t h e a c t i o n as on the r e s u l t i n g s t a t e : θνήσκει (pres.) is dying,
τέθνηκε (pf.)
is dead, έτεθνήκει (plpf.) was dead. 93. T h e p e r f e c t a c t i v e s y s t e m comprises the p e r f e c t a c t i v e a n d pluperfect active
the
(Table I I , p. 14). O n l y t w o A t t i c v e r b s (θνήσκω a n d
ί,'στημι) h a v e a f u t u r e p e r f e c t a c t i v e ; i n s t e a d of a f u t u r e p e r f e c t a c t i v e v e r b G r e e k uses r e g u l a r l y a p e r f e c t a c t i v e participle
(164) w i t h
the
f u t u r e of ειμί. Some perfects active
a n d p l u p e r f e c t s a c t i v e are first
perfects
and
first p l u p e r f e c t s ; s o m e are second. T h e difference is one of f o r m a t i o n , n o t of m e a n i n g ; b u t if a v e r b h a s b o t h a first p e r f e c t s y s t e m a n d a second p e r f e c t s y s t e m , t h e f o r m e r is g e n e r a l l y t r a n s i t i v e a n d the l a t t e r
in-
t r a n s i t i v e . άγω (7 lead) h a s o n l y a second p e r f e c t , ήχα I have led (pluperf e c t ή χ η 7 had led), πείθω (7 persuade) 7 have persuaded
h a s b o t h a first p e r f e c t , πέπεικα.
(pluperfect έπεπείκη 7 had persuaded),
and a second
p e r f e c t , πέποιθα 7 trust (pluperfect έπεποίθη 7 trusted), άπόλλϋμι {I h a s b o t h a first p e r f e c t , άπολώλεκα 7 have destroyed, άπόλωλα 7 am
destroy)
a n d a second p e r f e c t
destroyed,
94. T h e p e r f e c t i n d i c a t i v e a c t i v e is m a d e u p of reduplication
(98.1),
v e r b stem, p e r f e c t a c t i v e tense sign (κα in first p e r f e c t s , α in second perfects), a n d p r i m a r y a c t i v e personal endings (474): παιδεύω (παιδευ)
πε-παιδεύ-κα-μεν
(tense s t e m πεπαιδευκα)
ελπίζω
(έλπιδ)
ήλπί-κα-μεν
(tense s t e m ήλπικα)
πράττω
(πραγ)
πε-πράγ-α-μεν
(tense s t e m πεπραγα)
4ΐ
ιό
PHILOSOPHICAL
GREEK
95= T h e pluperfect indicative active is made up of a u g m e r t reduplicated perfect begins w i t h a consonant or if, h a v i n g
(if the "Attic"
reduplication [98.1c], it begins w i t h α or o). reduplication (98.1), v e r b stem, pluperfect active tense sign (in first pluperfects κη [in first and second persons singular, f r o m κεα], κει [in third person singular, from κεε ], κε [in dual and plural]; in second pluperfects η [in first and second persons singular, f r o m εα], ει [in third person singular, f r o m εε], ε [in dual and plural]), and secondary active personal endings (474): -παιδεύω (παιδευ)
έ-πε-παιδεύ-κε-μεν
ελπίζω
(έλπιδ)
ήλπί-κε-μεν
πράττω
(πραγ)
έ-πε -πράγ-ε-μεν
άγω
(άγ)
ήχ-ε-μεν
96. Stems ending in a τ - m u t e (τ, δ, θ) usually form a first perfect and drop the m u t e before κ (365): κομίζω
(κομιδ)
κε-κομί-κα-μεν
(tense stem κεκομικα)
πείθω
(πειθ)
πε-πεί-κα-μεν
(tense stem πεπεικα)
9 7 . Most π - m u t e and κ - m u t e stems form second perfects. In second perfects the mute is usually roughened if it is not already rough, a n d an ε in t h e v e r b stem is changed to ο (86): πέμπω
(πεμπ, πομπ)
πε-πόμφ-α-μεν
(tense stem πεπομφα)
θλίβω
(θλΐβ, θλιβ)
τε-θλίφ-α-μεν
(tense stem τεθλιφα)
πλέκω
(πλεκ, πλοκ, πλακ)
πε-πλόχ-α-μεν
(tense stem πέπλο χα)
άγω
(άγ)
ήχ-α-μεν
(tense stem ήχα)
9 8 . (ι) Reduplication in the perfect (and perfect middle) s y s t e m
takes
t h e following f o r m s : (a) In all verbs beginning w i t h a single simple consonant (except p) and in most verbs beginning w i t h a m u t e followed b y a liquid or nasal (λ, μ, ν, ρ) reduplication consists of the initial consonant f o l l o w e d b y ε; an initial rough m u t e smooth:
(Table I, p. 4) is changed t o t h e corresponding instruct grow (trans.)
πε-παίδευ-κα έ-πε-παιδεύ-κη πέ-φΰ-κα έ-πε-φϋ-κη
heap
κέ-χω-κα
έ-κε-χώ-κη
τέ-θυ-κα γέ-γραφ-α τέ-θλιφ-α
έ-τε-θύ-κη έ-γε-γράφ-η
παιδεύω φϋω Χόω
(παώευ)
θυω
(θϋ, θυ)
γράφω
(γραφ)
sacrifice write
θλίβω
(θλΐβ, θλιβ)
squeeze
(φϋ, φυ)
up
έ-τε-θλίφ-η
AN
INTRODUCTION
43'
(b) Irs most other ν«;rbs reduplication is like the a u g m e n t -στέλλω
(ρϊπ) (στελ, σταλ)
ζητέω αρπάζω
(ζητε) (άρπαγ)
αίρέω
(αίρε)
ρίπτω
(69)
throw
έ'-ρρΐφ-α
send
έ-σταλ-κα
έ-στάλ-κη
seek
έ-ζήτη-κα
seize take
ήρπα-κα
έ-ζητή-κη ήρπά-χη
ήρη-κα
ήρή-κη
έ-ρρίφ-η
(c) In some verbs beginning w i t h α, ε, or o, followed b y a single •consonant, reduplication
("Attic")
takes
the f o r m of prefixing
the
first t w o letters and a u g m e n t i n g the original initial v o w e l ; verbs b e ginning w i t h ε take no additional a u g m e n t in the p l u p e r f e c t : ακούω
(άκου for άκο-F)
hear
άκ-ήκο-α
ήκ-ηκο-η
έρχομαι
(έρχ, έλυθ)
go
έλ-ήλυθ-α
έλ-ηλύθ-η
•ομνϋμι
(όμ, όμο)
swear
ομ-ώμο-κα
ώμ-ωμό-κη
^2) Reduplication in the present s y s t e m is rare. It takes the form of prefixing the initial consonant plus ι: γι-γνώ-σκω, δί-δω-μι. (3) Reduplication in the aorist systems is e x t r e m e l y rare. It resembles " A t t i c " reduplication b u t l a c k s the lengthening of the initial v o w e l of the verb s t e m : άγω φέρω
(άγ) (φερ, ένεκ, ένεγκ)
lead bear
ήγαγον (άγαγ augmented) ήνεγκα and ήνεγκον
9 9 . Perfect Indicative A c t i v e : instruct πε-παίδευ-κα πε-παίδευ-κα-ς πε-παίδευ-κε(ν) πε-παιδεύ-κα-τον πε-παιδεύ-κα-τον
send
Pursue
tell
πε -πομφ -α πέ -πομφ -α-ς
δε-δίωχ-α δε-δίωχ-α-ς δε-δίωχ-ε (ν)
πέ -φρα-κα πέ -φρα-κα-ς
/
πέ -πομφ--ε(ν)
πέ -φρα-κε(ν)
πε -πόμφ -α-τον
δε-διώχ-α-τον
πε -φρά-κα-τον
πε -πόμφ--α-τον
δε-διώχ-α-τον
πε--φρά-κα-τον
πε -πόμφ--α-μεν πε -πόμφ--α-τε
δε-διώχ-α-μεν
πε-παιδεύ-κα-τε
πε -φρά-κα-μεν πε -φρά-κα-τε
πε-παιδεύ -κάσι (ν)
πε -πόμφ-•άσι(ν)
πε-παιδεύ-κα-μεν
δε-διώχ-α-τε δε-διώχ-άσι(ν)
πε -φρά-κάσι(ν)
Pluperfect Indicative A c t i v e : έ-πε-παιδεύ-κη
έ-πε-πόμφ-η
|-δε-διώχ-η
έ-πε-φρά-κη
έ-πε-παιδεύ-κη-ς
έ-πε~πόμφ-η-ς
έ-δε-διώχ-η-ς
έ-πε-φρά-κη-ς
έ -πε -παιδεύ -κει (ν)
έ-πε-πόμφ-ει(ν)
έ-δε-διώχ-ει(ν)
έ-πε-φρά-κει(ν)
ιό
PHILOSOPHICAL
GREEK
έ-πε-παιδεύ-κε-τον
έ-πε-πόμφ-ε-τον
έ-δε-διώχ-ε-τον
ε -πε -φρα-κε-τον
έ-πε-παιδευ-κέ-την
έ-πε-πομφ-έ-την
έ-δε-διωχ-έ-την
έ-πε-φρα-κέ-την
έ-πε-παιδεύ-κε-μεν
έ-πε-πόμφ-ε-μεν
έ-δε-διώχ-ε-μεν
έ-πε-φρά-κε-μεν
έ-πε-παιδεύ-κε-τε
έ-πε-πόμφ-ε-τε
έ-δε-διώχ-ε-τε
έ-πε-φρά-κε-τε
έ-πε-παιδεύ-κε-σαν
έ-πε-πόμ,φ-ε-σαν
έ-δε-διώχ-ε-σαν
έ-πε-φρά-κε-σαν
1 0 0 . First and second perfect infinitives a c t i v e end in (κ)έ-ναι (474)·' παιδεύω
πε-πα.ίδευ-κα
πεπαιδευκέναι
πράττω
πέ-πραγ-α
πεπραγέναι
T h e accent (as a l w a y s with the ending ναι) is on the penult. There are no imperfect or pluperfect infinitives. 101.
VOCABULARY
ά ρ χ ω (άρχ), άρξω, ήρξα [ a r c h a n g e l ] , rule (with p a r t i t . g e n . ) ; be first (with p t c . ) ; begin (with p a r t i t . gen., inf., or p t c . ) . βάπτω (βαφ: 477), βάψω, έβαψα [ b a p t i z e ] , dip, dye. β λ ά π τ ω (βλαβ: 4 7 7 ) , βλάψω, έβλαψα, βέβλαφα, harm. β ο υ λ δ ύ ω , βουλεύσω, έβούλευσα, βεβούλευκά [βουλή], plan, plot (with inf.). θ η ρ ε ύ ω , Οη ρεύσω, έΟήρευσα, τεθήρευκα [θηρίον], hunt, catch. θηρίον, ου, τό, wild animal, L a t . FERA. θ υ ω (θΰ, 0υ), Οϋσω, £θΰσα, τέθυκα, sacrifice. δμοιος, α, ον [ h o m o e o p a t h y ] , like, similar (with d a t . ) ; ομοίως (adv.), in like manner. δμως (particle), all the same, nevertheless. πάνυ (adv.), very, wholly. πρό
[prologue,
(prep.),
1 0 2 . (l)
FOR,
Δ β FORE
του
FORE,
Lat.
(of p l a c e
προς
PRO]
or t i m e ) ,
in behalf of, in preference to (with gen.). ( N e v e r suffers elision.) πρός [ p r o s e l y t e ] (prep.), from a position facing, by (in s w e a r i n g , w i t h g e n . ) ; in a position facing, near, at, besides (with d a t . ) ; to a position facing, to, against (with acc,). προσ-αγορεύω, προσαγορεύσω, etc. [αγορεύω harangue, αγορά], address, greet; address as, greet as, call (with d o u b l e acc.). συν-έχω, συνέξω, συνέσχον, συνέσχηκα^ hold together, confine. τάττω ( τ α γ - y o : 477), τάξω, έταξα, τέταχα [ t a c t i c s , t a x i d e r m y , s y n t a x ] , post, assign, order, marshal. φ ύ ω , φϋσω, έφΰσα [BE], produce·, εφϋν (465), grew ( i n t r a n s . ) ; πέφΰκα, be by nature. ώς (rel. p r o n o m . a d v . ) , as\ as c o n j u n c t i v e a d v . , as soon as (298-299), ώ σ π ε ρ ( e m p h a t i c rel. p r o n o m . a d v . ) , just as.
τους ξένους λόγου ήρχεν ώδε.
νήσους και πρό του πολέμου έβεβλάφετε. δεσποτών 'ίππους και τά άλλα ζώα; φίλους προσαγόρεύσομεν. ανθρώπους οί στρατιώται.
(4) όμως δ' έν ταΐς έπιστολαΐς τους
(5) ώσπερ θηρία, τεθηρεύκασιν οί νεάνίαι, ούτως (6) φύλλα φΰσει τά πρό του οίκου δένδρα.
εις τον ποταμό ν έ'βαψαν οί Ά τ ρ είδα ι τάς μαχαίρας. πρός ταΰτα βεβούλευκας.
(2) λέγομεν οτι τας
(3) τεθύκάσιν οί δούλοι τάς τε των
(7)
(8) βούλας πάνυ δικαίας
(9) τό ομοιον τω όμοίω φίλον.
πολεμίων ΐππον τους νέους τών στρατιωτών έτετάχεμεν.
(ίο) πρός τήν τών
AN
INTRODUCTION
45
103. ( ι ι ) T h e gods held the citizens together. (12) T h e barbarians used to address their physicians as gods. (13) T h e child will not h a r m the boats. (14) Nevertheless t h e y s a y t h a t the m a n in the b o a t stole the gifts. (15) W e h a d caught ten wild animals near the river. (16) The barbarians were dipping their bowstrings in t h e river. (17) Men (use generic article) rule slaves, and gods [rule] men. (18) H a v e y o u already sacrificed to the gods ? (19) W e grew as t h e leaves [grew], (20) T h e cithara p l a y e r ' s letter w a s v e r y long.
XV.
Ω-VERBS
Stems in Λ , Μ, Ν , Ρ Βέλτερον ύφ' ετέρου ή ΰφ' έαυτοϋ έπαινέεσθαι^ Δημόκριτος. Another's praise is better than self-praise_
1 0 4 . F r o m v e r b stems in λ, ν, ρ the present is ordinarily formed
by
a d d i n g the tense sign y : άγγέλλω (άγγελ) announce
is f r o m άγγελ-y-ω
φαίνω (φαν) show
is from ©av-y-ω
τείνω (τεν, τα f r o m tn \t followed b y vocalic n\) stretch
is from τεν-y-co
φθείρω (φθερ, φθορ, φθαρ) destroy
is from φθερ-y-to
κρίνω (κριν, κρι) distinguish
is from κριν-ν-ω
αΐσχυνω (αίσχυν) disgrace
is f r o m αίσχυν-y-ω
T h e y is assimilated to a preceding λ (378), b u t j u m p s a preceding ν or ρ to form w i t h a preceding α t h e diphthong at (376). i f ν or ρ is preceded b y ε, ι, or υ, the y disappears, and these vowels are lengthened in c o m pensation t o ει, l, ΰ. F r o m most stems in μ and from a few stems in λ, ν, ρ the present is. formed (as in παιδεύω) without a tense sign: δ έ μ - ω [TIMBER,
Lat.
DOMUS] build
μ έ ν - ω R^MAIN
μέλ-ω concern
φέρ-ω BEAR
105. In verbs whose stems end in λ, μ, ν, or ρ the f u t u r e active is o r d i narily formed b y adding the tense sign εσ; after the disappearance of the: intervocalic σ (375) the ε contracts w i t h the following v o w e l : άγγέλλω τείνω
άγγελ-έσ-ω τεν-έσ-ω
άγγελώ τενω
φαίνω φθείρω
φαν-έσ-ω φΟερ-έσ-ω
φανώ φθερώ
μένω (μεν, μενη) νέμο) (νεμ, νεμη) distribute
μεν-έσ-ω νεμ-έσ-ω
μενώ νεμώ
46
AN
INTRODUCTION
47'
106. In the first aorist active of these verbs the tense sign σα loses its σ, and the vowel of the v e r b stem is lengthened in compensation (a to η [after ι or ρ to a], and ε to ει) : έ-φα ν-σα έ-περαν-σα
φαίνω περαίνω (πέραν) άγγέλλω
accomplish
έφηνα έπέράνα ήγγειλα
ήγγελ-σα έ-τεν-σα
τείνω φθειρός δέμω μένω κρίνω αίσχϋνω
έ-φθερ-σα έ-δεμ-σα
έτεινα έφθειρα έδει μα
έ-μεν-σα έ-κριν-σα
έμεινα έκρινα
ήσχυν-σα
ήσχϋνα
107. Perfects active of these v e r b s are formed in various w a y s : First άγγέλλω (άγγελ)
ήγγελκα
βάλλω (βαλ, βλη) throw
βέβληκα μεμέληκα
μέλω (μελ, μελη) τέμνω (τεμ, ταμ, τ μη) cut
Second
Perfect
θνήσκω (θνη, θνα, θαν) die
τέτμηκα τέθνηκα
κρίνω (κριν, κρι) μένω (μεν, μενη)
κέκρικα μεμένηκα
φαίνω (φαν) τείνω (τεν, τα) κτείνω (κτεν, κτον, κτ-xv) kill
πέφαγκα (369) τέτακα
φθείρω (φθερ, φθορ, φθ#ρ)
εφθαρκα
108.
Perfect
τέθνατον (466)
πέφηνα
(intrans.)
εκτονα δι-έφΟορα (intrans.
VOCABULARY
αίσχόνω (αισχυν: 4 7 7 ) , αίσχυνώ, ήσχϋνα, disgrace. άπο-κτείνω (κτεν, κτον: 477)) άττοκτενώ (105), άπέκτεΐνα, άπέκτονα, kill. άπο-νέμω (νεμ, νεμη), άπονεμώ (105), απένειμα, άπονενέμηκα [νόμος], distribute. κ ρ ί ν ω (κριν,. κρι: 4 7 7 ) ' κρινώ, έ'κρΤνα, κέκρικα [critic, crisis], distinguish, pick out, judge, tryh1 c o u r t , L a t . CKRNO. μ έ ν ω (μεν, μενη), μενώ (105), έμεινα, μεμένηκα, ί'βΜΑΙΝ, last, L a t . μ α ν ε ο . μ ή - τ ε (copul. c o n j . ) , and not, L a t . neQUE; μήτε . . . μήτε, neither . . . nor. νόμος, ου, ό [ m e t r o n o m e ] , custom, law. π ε ρ α ί ν ω (πέραν: 477), περάνω, έπέράνα [πέρας limit, end], accomplish.
οϋ-τε (copul. c o n j . ) , and not, Lat. •weQUE; οΰτε . . . ουτε, neither . . . nor. τ ε ί ν ω (τεν, τ α : 477, 86), τενώ, έτεινα, τέτακα,
stretch,
^TEND, Lat.
TENDO
(trans, a n d intrans.). υφαίνω (ύφαν: 477), ύφανώ, ϋφηνα [WEB], WEAVE.
φ έ ρ ω (φερ, οί, ένεκ, ένεγκ), οϊσω, ήνεγκα. (98.3) and ήνεγκον (trans, b y e x c e p t i o n ; cf, 85). έ ν ή ν ο χ α [ m e t a p h o r , BURDEN,
BTEH,
BIKTH,
Lat.
FERO,
FUR],
BEAR, bring, carry. φ θ ε ί ρ ω (φθερ, φθορ, φθαρ: 4 7 7 h φθερώ, έφθειρα, εφθαρκα [φθορά], destroy. φθορά, ας, ή. destruction, decay, passing away, CORRUPTIO.
ιό
109.
PHILOSOPHICAL
GREEK
(l) οΰτε τούς νόμους ούτε τούς πολίτας ήσχϋναν.
στρατιώτάς.
(3) δώρα
κεκρίκασιν, οί δ' οΰ. μένουσιν οί νόμοι. <χΙ δ' οΰ.
καλά
τοις
φίλοις
άπενείματε.
(2) άπέκτεινον δέ (4) οί
(5) τω δέ παιδοτρίβη δώρα ήνεγκε τά
(7) οί κιθαρισταί έπέράναν τήν όδόν.
(9) τά τέκνα τάς νευρας τείνει,
μέν
ήδη
τέκνα.
(6)
(8) αί μεν ΰφαινον,
(ίο) περί φθοράς γέγραφεν.
1 1 0 , ( ι ι ) Y o u h a d not destroyed either the b o a t s or the houses. will not disgrace m y children. letters into the house. [there is] not.
(13) T h e y o u n g m a n will c a r r y
the
(14) F o r m e n there is destruction, b u t for gods
(15) T h e trainers s a y t h a t he did not finish his journey.
(16) T h e cithara player h a d p i c k e d out ten of the children. did n o t remain in t h a t place. citizens.
(12) I
(19) She w a s w e a v i n g
ordered the soldiers not to steal.
(17) H e
(18) T h e e n e m y h a v e n o t killed the and he w a s writing.
(20) He
had
XVI. THE THIRD Nouns
DECLENSION
with Mute
Stems Εΰρηκα, εΰρηκα. 'Αρχιμήδης. I have found it, I have found
it!
1 1 1 . T h e case endings of t h e third declension are: Masculine and Feminine s.
N.
-ς or
G. D.
-ος -ι
A. V.
-κ or -v -ς or —
D. N. Α. G. D . P.
N. V. G. D. A.
V.
—
(-s or —•) (4s)
(-)
-ος
(-is)
-ι
(-Ό
Η) (-em)
—
(-s or — )
—
-ε -ow -ες -ων
Neuter —
(-) (-)
-e -01V
(-es)
-a
(-a)
(-um)
-ων
(-um)
-σι -a
(-ibus)
(-ibus) -σι -ας or -νς (-es)
(-a)
1 1 2 . T h e stem of a noun of the third declension can ordinarily be f o u n d b y dropping the genitive singular ending ος; but note 367. 1 1 3 . Monosyllabic stems of the third declension are accented on the ultima in the genitive a n d d a t i v e of all numbers; the endings oiv and ων are circumflexed. 114. π - m u t e and. κ - m u t e stems (always masculine or feminine): thief κλώψ (ό) κλωπός κλωπί
vein φλέψ (ή) φλεβός
κλώπα
φλεβί φλέβα
κλώψ
φλέψ
herald κήρυξ (ό) κήρΰκος κήρΰκι κήρυκα κήρυξ 49
battle line φάλαγξ (ή) φάλαγγας φάλαγγι φάλαγγα φάλαγξ
ιό
PHILOSOPHICAL
thief
vein
GREEK
herald
battle line φάλαγγε φαλάγγοιν
κλώπε κλωποΐν
φλέβε φλεβοΐν
κήρϋκε κηρϋκοιν
κλώπες κλωπών κλωψί (ν)
φλέβες φλεβών
κήρυκες κηρύκων
φάλαγγες φαλάγγων
φλεψί (ν)
κήρυξι(ν)
κλώπας
φλέβας
κήρυκας
φάλαγξι(ν' φάλαγγας
115. τ - m u t e stems (masculine, feminine, or neuter):
< C-
night
grace
hope έλπίς (ή)
bird
ελπίδος
δρνΐς (ο, ή) 6ρνϊθος
έλπίδι ελπίδα
ορνϊθι δρνΐν
νυκτί νύκτα
χάρις (ή) χάριτος χάριτι χάριν
νύξ
χάρι
έλπί
ορνϊ
νύκτε νυκτοΐν
χάριτε
έλπίδε έλπίδοιν
ορνϊθε
νύκτες νυκτών
χάριτες
έλπίδες ελπίδων
όρνιθες
νυκτός
νυξί(ν) νύκτας
χαρίτοιν χαρίτων χάρισι(ν)
έλπίσι(ν)
ορνίθων ορνϊσι(ν)
ελπίδας
όρνιθας
χάριτας body
old man
όρνίθοιν
giant
γέρων (ό)
σώμα (τό)
γέροντος γέροντι γέροντα
σώματος
γίγαντος
σώματι σώμα
γίγαντι γίγαντα
γέρον
σώμα
γίγαν
γέροντε
σώματε σωμάτοιν
γίγαντε γιγάντοιν
σώματα σωμάτων
γίγαντες γιγάντων
γερό ντο ιν γέροντες γερόντων γέρουσι (ν) γέροντας
γίγας (ό)
σώμασι (ν)
γίγάσι(ν)
σώματα
γίγαντας
τ-mutes and ν disappear before σ (360, 371). W h e n ντ disappears, the preceding
v o w e l is lengthened
dropped when final (5).
in compensation
(372). τ-mutes
are
AN INTRODUCTION Exceptions
1 1 6 . G e n e r a l R u l e s for Masculine
in
some
T-mute
Stems:
and Feminine Nouns with Mute
51'
Stems: But
T h e n o m i n a t i v e singular a d d s ς.
stems in
οντ
(always
culine) g e n e r a l l y drop τ
(5)
masand
l e n g t h e n t h e last v o w e l : γεροντ-, γέρων. T h e a c c u s a t i v e singular a d d s a.
B u t b a r y t o n e s (10) in ις or ϊς d r o p
T h e v o c a t i v e singular is like t h e
B u t in s t e m s in ιδ, ιτ, ϊθ, ντ it is
the τ - m u t e a n d a d d ν: χαριτ-, χάριν. like
nominative.
the
stem:
έλπιδ-,
έλπί
(5);
χαριτ-, χάρι; γεροντ-, γέρον. 1 1 7 . S o m e n e u t e r s are i n f l e c t e d like σώμα in all cases e x c e p t the nominative, a c c u s a t i v e , a n d v o c a t i v e limit
water
singular: knee
πέρας
ΰδωρ
γόνυ
πέρατος
ύδατος
γόνατος
πέρατι
ΰδατι
γόνατι
πέρας
ΰδωρ
γόνυ
πέρας
ΰδωρ
γόνυ
πέρατε
ΰδατε
γόνατε
περάτοιν
ύδάτοιν
γονάτοιν
πέρατα
ύδατα
γόνατα
περάτων
υδάτων
γονάτων
πέρασι (ν)
ΰδασι (ν)
γόνασι (ν
πέρατα
ΰδατα
γόνατα
118.
VOCABULARY
•αίμα, ατος, τό [anaemia], blood. άρχων, οντος, ο, -ruler, commander, archon. γέρων, οντος, 6, old man. γίγας, αντος, ό [gigantic], giant, γόνυ, ατος, τό, KNEE, L a t ,
GENU.
€ioi(v) (end.), are (3d plur. pres. ind. of ειμί). Ίλπίς, ίδος, ή, hope.
έστί(ν) 1 (end.), is (3d sing. pres. ind. of ειμί). εναιμος, ov [έν + κΐμα: 41], with blood IN one; £ναι.μα, τά, red-blooded animals. θρίξ (θριχ: 367), τριχός, ή [trichinosis], hair. κήρυξ, ϋκος, ό, herald. κλώψ,, κλωπός, 6 [κλέπτω, LIFT], thief.
ι. 2στι at the beginning of a sentence; when it signifies existence or possibility; and after ούκ, μή, εί, καί, άλλά, τοΰτο, and the adv. ώς.
ιό
72PHILOSOPHICAL
κτήμα, ατός, τό [κτάομαι acquire], a possession. νύξ, νυκτός, ή, NIC.HT, L a t . NOX. δνομα, ατος, τό [ s y n o n y m ] , NAME, NOUN, word, L a t . NOMEN, N O M E N . ΰρνΐς, ϊθος, ό, ή [ornithology], bird. πέρας, ατος, τό [περαίνω], limit, end. σχήμα, ατος, τό [έχω, scheme], shape, form, appearance. σώμα, ατος, τό [somatic, c h r o m o s o m e ] , body.
GREEK
ϋδωρ, ατος, τό [hydrogen, WET, UNDA],
φάλαγξ,, αγγος, ή [phalanx], battle line. <ρλέψ, φλεβός, ή [phlebitis, phlebotomy], vein. χάρις, ιτος, ή [eucharist], favor, gratitude ; χάριν £χω, be grateful; χάριν (acc. as adv., usually postpos.), for the sake of (with gen.), χρώμα, ατος, τό [chromatic, chromosome], color.
119.
( ί ) α ί μ α λέγουσιν οί σοφοί τήν ψϋχήν.
ματα
ο'ίσουσιν
εναιμοί είσιν
οί
κήρυκες.
γέρων κ λ ώ ψ ;
(ii) The
(2) έκ της οικίας τ ά
κτή-
του δ' άρχοντος χάριν έκιθαρίζετε.
(4)
(5) πέρας ούκ εχει τ ά κ α κ ά .
(7) τ ά δ' εναιμα τ ρ ί χ α ς έχει.
(9) τ ά σ χ ή μ α τ α κ α λ ά ήν. 120.
(3)
( ΐ 7 9 · 3 ) οί όρνιθες.
doctors
(6) ήν ό
(8) έσωσεν ο γέρων τό σ ώ μ α ;
( ί ο ) τ ρ ί χ ε ς δ' ούκ ήσαν. treat
the
thieves did not kill the herald.
slaves
at
night
(12)
The
(15) T h e o l d m e n w e r e g r a t e f u l .
(16) N e v e r t h e l e s s t h e G r e e k b a t t l e l i n e w a s s m a l l . colorless ( " T h e r e w a s n o t color to t h e v e i n s " ) . treat the old m a n ' s knees.
(322.4).
(13) T h e r e w a s n o w a t e r i n t h e p l a c e .
(14) R e d - b l o o d e d a n i m a l s h a v e v e i n s .
hope.
Lat.
WATER.
(17) T h e v e i n s w e r e (18) T h e d o c t o r
will
(19) A t t h a t t i m e t h e h e r a l d s w e r e w i t h o u t
(20) B i r d s h a v e n o h a i r .
XVII. THE THIRD DECLENSION Nouns
with Nasal
or Liquid
Stems or with Stems in
Σ
Κτήμα ές αίεί. Θουκϋδίδου 'Ιστοριών i. 22. 4· A -possession forever. 1 2 1 . R e g u l a r n a s a l or l i q u i d s t e m s : contest
a
divinity
άγών (ό)
δαίμων (ό, ή)
μήν (ό)
αγώνος
δαίμονος
μηνός
άγώνι
δαίμονι
αγώνα
δαίμονα
άγών
salt
άλς (ό, ή) θήρ (ό)
air 1 αήρ (ό)
πυρ (τό)
άλός
θηρός
αέρος
πυρός
μηνί
αλί
θηρί
αέρι
πυρί
μήνα
άλα
θήρα
αέρα
πυρ
δαϊμον
μήν
άλς
θήρ
αήρ
πυρ
άγώνε
δαίμονε
μήνε
άλε
θήρε
αέρε
άγώνοιν
δαιμόνοιν
μηνοΐν
άλοΐν
θηροΐν
αέροιν
αγώνες
δαίμονες
μήνες
άλες
θήρες
αέρες
άγώνων
δαιμόνων
μηνών
άλών
θηρών
αέρων
άγώσι(ν)
δαίμοσι(ν)
μησί(ν)
άλσί (ν)
θηρσί (ν)
άέρσι(ν)
άγώνας
δαίμονας
μήνας
άλας
θήρας
αέρας
month
wild animal
fire
N o t e t h a t in regular m a s c u l i n e s a n d feminines h a v i n g nasal or l i q u i d stem (1) T h e
nominative
s i n g u l a r does n o t
ordinarily
add
ς but instead
l e n g t h e n s t h e last v o w e l of t h e s t e m . (In άλς t h e n o m i n a t i v e
could
not be like t h e stem, since G r e e k w o r d s do n o t end in λ : 5·)
Hence
the n o m i n a t i v e s i n g u l a r does n o t s h o w t h e q u a n t i t y of the last v o w e l of the s t e m : cf. άγων (άγων) w i t h ήγεμών (ήγεμον), μήν (μην)
with
φρήν (φρεν), θήρ (θηρ) w i t h αήρ (άερ). (2) T h e a c c u s a t i v e singular a l w a y s a d d s α. (3) T h e v o c a t i v e singular is like t h e n o m i n a t i v e in o x y t o n e s (άγων, μήν), like t h e s t e m in b a r y t o n e s (δαϊμον).
53
72
PHILOSOPHICAL
122. " S y n c o p a t e d "
GREEK
EP-stems:
father
mother
daughter
man
πατήρ
pater
μήτηρ
θυγάτηρ
άνήρ
πατρός
patris
μητρός
θυγατρός
ανδρός
πατρί
patri
μητρί
θυγατρί
άνδρί
πατέρα
patrem
μητέρα
θυγατέρα
ανορα
πάτερ
pater
μήτερ
θύγατερ
άνερ
μητέρε μητέροιν
θυγατέρε
άνδρε
θυγατέροιν
άνδροΐν άνδρες
πατέρε πατέροιν πατέρες
patres
μητέρες
θυγατέρες
πατέρων
patrum
μητέρων
θυγατέρων
άνδρών
πατράσι(ν)
patribus
μητράσι(ν)
θυγατράσι (ν)
άνδράσι(ν
πατέρας
patres
μητέρας
θυγατέρας
άνδρας
W h e n a n a s a l is f o l l o w e d b y I or r, a v o i c e d m u t e of t h e s a m e class (6) is f r e q u e n t l y d e v e l o p e d in m a n y l a n g u a g e s ; hence t h e 8 in άνήρ w h e n t h e ε is d r o p p e d . Cf. tender ( L a t .
tener).
N o t e t h a t " s y n c o p a t e d " E P - s t e m s resemble other P - s t e m s a n d a r e like άήρ e x c e p t
that
(1) T h e g e n i t i v e a n d d a t i v e s i n g u l a r l a c k t h e ε. (2) T h e v o c a t i v e singular is like t h e s t e m . (3) T h e d a t i v e p l u r a l h a s pom, n o t ερσι. (4) T h e a c c e n t u a t i o n is irregular. ί 23· Σ-stems: race (γένε(σ) -ος) (γένε(σ)·
trireme τριήρης (ή)
γένος (τό)
genus
γένους
generis
(τριήρε(σ) -ος)
γένει
generi
(τριήρε(σ) - 0
τριήρει
γένος
genus
(τριήρε(σ) -α)
τριήρη
γένος
genus
τριήρους
τριήρες
(γένε (σ)·-ε)
γένει
(τριήρε(σ)
(γενέ(σ) -οιν)
γεν οιν
(τριηρέ(σ)·-οιν)
(γένε (σ) -α)
γένη
τριήρει τριήροιν
genera
(τριήρε(σ)
τριήρεις τριήρων τριήρεσι(ν)
(γενέ (σ)·-ων)
γενών
generum
(τριηρέ (σ) -ων)
(γένε(σ)·-σι)
γένεσι(ν)
generibus
(τριήρε(σ) -σι)
(γένε (σ) -α)
γένη
genera
τριήρεις
AN INTRODUCTION
55
wing
Aristotle 'Αριστοτέλης (ό)
κέρας (τό)
'Αριστοτέλους
(κέρα(σ)-ος)
κέρως
Άριστοτέλει
(κέρα(σ)-ι)
κέραι
'Αριστοτέλη (ν)
κέρας
Άριστότελες
κέρας (κέρα (σ)-ε)
κέρα
(κερά(σ)-οιν)
κερών
(κέρα (σ)-α)
κέρα
(κερά (σ)-ων)
κερών
(κέρατ-σι)
κέρασι(ν)
(κέρα (σ)-α)
κέρα
N o t e t h a t in s t e m s in σ (ι) T h e letter before t h e σ is a l w a y s a v o w e l ; hence, w h e n the σ disappearsb e t w e e n v o w e l s (375), there is an o p p o r t u n i t y for c o n t r a c t i o n . (2) W h e n an α - s o u n d m e e t s an e-sound, t h e one t h a t c o m e s first p r e v a i l s : γένε(σ)-α γένη, κέρα(σ)-ε κέρα. (3) A n ο-sound p r e v a i l s o v e r an « - s o u n d or an ^-sound ( w h a t e v e r t h e o r d e r ) : γένε(σ)-ος γένους, γενέ(σ)-οιν γενοΐν, γενέ (σ) -ων γενών, κέρα(σ)ος κέρως, κερά(σ) -ο ι ν κερών, κερά (σ) -ων κερών. (4) ε
ε
= ει.
(5) W h e n σσ results f r o m inflection, as in the d a t i v e plural, one σ i s dropped. (6) T h e a c c e n t of τριήροιν a n d τριήρων is irregular (for τριηροΐν, τριηρών). (7) T h e a c c u s a t i v e plural of τριήρης has a n o m i n a t i v e plural ending. 124.
VOCABULARY
άγών, ώυος, ό [άγω, agony], contest, games. αήρ, αέρος, ό, air. δλς, άλός, ά, SALT, Lat. SAL; ή, sea. άνήρ, ανδρός, ό (polyandry, Andrew], man, Lat. vir. Αριστοτέλης, ους, ό, Aristotle, γέ (encl. particle), at least. γένος, ους, τό, race, stock, KIN, class, Lat.
GENS,
GENUS,
GENUS.
δαίμων, ονος, ό, ή [demon], a divinity. ήγεμονία, ας, ή [ήγεμών], hegemony, ήγεμών, όνος, ό, ή, leader, guide. θήρ, θηρός, ό [θηρίον], wild animal, Lat. FERA.
θυγάτηρ, τρός, ή, DAUGHTER. κέρας (κερατ), ατος, τό [rhinoceros]^ HORN, L a t .
COKNU.
κέρας (κερασ), κέρως, τό, wing of an army, Lat. CORNU; επί κέρως, in column. κρέας (κρεασ), κρέως, τό [creosote], meat. μήν,
μηνός,
ό,
[MOON],
MONTH,
Lat.
MENSIS.
μήν (postpos. particle), surely, truly. μήτηρ, τρός, ή, MOTHER, Lat. MATER. πάθημα, ατος, τό [Lat. PATIOR], anything that befalls one, suffering, affection.
72
PHILOSOPHICAL
GREEK
£ήμα, ατος, τό, WORD, phrase, VERBUM. ρήτωρ, ορος, ό [ρήμα, r h e t o r i c ] , speaker.
-πάθος, ους, τό [ p a t h o s , s y m p a t h y , L a t . PATIOR], anything that befalls one, experience, accident, suffering, PAS-
τριήρης,
SION.
ους, ή,
TRIREME.
πυρ, πυρός, τό (sing, o n l y ) [ p y r e ] , FIRE.
φρήν, φρενός, ή, diaphragm, heart (as s e a t of passions or of m e n t a l f a c u l t i e s ) .
125.
φρένας έ β λ α ψ ε ν .
πατήρ,
τρός, 6, FATHER, L a t . PATER.
(i)
b δαίμων τα ς του ήγεμόνος
χ ο υ σ ι ν οί όρνιθες.
(3) τ η ς τ ο υ
1
'Αριστοτέλους
(4) ού μ ή ν φ ε ύ γ ο υ σ ι ν οί άνδρες.
του αέρος
(5) π ο υ δ' ή σ α ν τ ό τ ε κ ρ έ α ς κ α ι ό
(6) ο ί γ ε ρ ή τ ο ρ ε ς τ ό γ έ ν ο ς ο ύ κ ή σ χ ϋ ν α ν . (8) ή τ ο υ Π λ ά τ ω ν ο ς
(ζ)
(j)
ήν ό ά γ ω ν π ε ρ ί τ η ς
μ ή τ η ρ θυγάτηρ ήν τ ο υ ήγεμόνος.
ρήματα νόμος εστί τοις τέκνοις,
(ίο)
άρ-
θ υ γ α τ ρ ό ς υιός ήν ό ρ ή τ ω ρ . άλς;
ψυχής;
(9) τ ά τ ο υ
πατρός
επί κέρως ήγεν ό ή γ ε μ ώ ν τ ώ ν
βαρ-
βάρων. 126.
(n)
Where
were
the
animals h a v e horns, some village. remained
(14) T h e there
ten
(18)
orators's words
[have] not.
suffering
was
months.
against their daughters ? were brave.
triremes
(17)
at
that (13)
terrible. (16)
Were
time? There
(12)
was
(15)
The
the
mothers
no
fire in
speaker's
wild the
mother
plotting
B o t h the m a n ' s father a n d his
Certainly there are no wild animals there.
are beautiful.
Some
evil
brother (19)
(20) A t p r e s e n t t h e r e a r e g a m e s i n
The the
villages. 1. T h e article is o f t e n used w i t h n a m e s of persons or p l a c e s w e l l k n o w n or already introduced.
XVIII. THE THIRD DECLENSION Nouns
with Vowel or Diphthong
Stems
"Ο τι καλόν φίλο ν αεί. Εύρΐπίδου Βάκχαις 88ι. A thing of beauty is a. joy forever.
127. Stems in I and Y : state πόλις (πόλε-ι)
(πόλε-ε)
(πόλε-ες)
fish (ή)
ίχθός
town (ό)
άστυ
πόλεως
ιχθύος
πόλει
ίχθύι
πόλιν
ίχθΰν
άστυ
πόλι
ίχΟΰ
άστυ
πόλει
ΐχθύε
πολέοιν
ίχθύοιν
πόλεις
ίχθύες
πόλεων
ιχθύων
πόλεσι(ν)
ίχθύσι(ν)
πόλεις
(ίχθυ-νς)
ίχθΰς
(τό)
άστεως (άστε-ι)
(άστε-ε)
άστει
άστει άστέοιν
(άστε-α)
άστη άστεων ά σ τ ε σ ι (ν)
(άστε-α)
άστη
1 2 8 . D i p h t h o n g stems old woman γραϋς
king
(ή)
βασιλεύς (ό) ναϋς
γράός γράΐ
(βασιλέ-ι)
οχ, cow
ship (ή)
βοϋς
βασιλέως
νεώς
βοός
βασιλεΐ
νηί
βοΐ
γραΰν
βασιλέα
ναΰν
βουν
γραΰ
βασιλεϋ
ναΰ
βοΰ
γράε
βασιλή
νήε
βόε
γράοΐν
βασιλέοιν
νεοΐν
βοοΐν
βασιλής or
νήες
βόες
νεών
βοών
γράες
(βασιλή-ες)
(ό, ή )
βασιλείς γράών
βασιλέων
γ ρ α υ σ ί (ν)
βασιλεϋ σι (ν) ναυσί (ν)
βουσί(ν)
γραΰς
βασιλέας
βοΰς
SI
ναυς
72
PHILOSOPHICAL GREEK
1 2 9 , N o t e t h a t in m a s c u l i n e a n d f e m i n i n e v o w e l a n d d i p h t h o n g s t e m s of t h e t h i r d declension (1) T h e n o m i n a t i v e singular a d d s ς. (2) T h e v o c a t i v e singular is like the s t e m . (3) T h e υ of ευ, αυ, ου represents an original F ( d i g a m m a = w ) , w h i c h d i s a p p e a r s b e t w e e n v o w e l s a n d is elsewhere v o c a l i z e d . (4) T h e a c c e n t of t h e g e n i t i v e singular a n d plural of s t e m s in 1 a n d υ is an e x c e p t i o n t o 1 1 . 130.
VOCABULARY
άλλά [άλλος] (adversative conj.), but (stronger than δέ), well. άστυ, εως, τό, town. βάλλω (βαλ, βλη: 37 s ), β«λώ (105), έβαλον, βέβληκα [problem, hyperbole], throw, pelt, shoot. βασιλεύς, έως, ό [basilica], king. βασιλεύω, βασιλεύσω, έβασίλευσα, be king (βασιλεύς), rule (with gen. or dat.). βοΰς, βοός, ό, ή [bucolic, hecatomb], ox, cow, Lat. B O S . γραΰς, γραός, ή [γέρων], old woman. γυνή, γυναικός, ή [gynaecology, misogynist], woman, wife (398). έκ-βάλλω, έκβαλω, έξέβαλον, έκβέβληκα, throw out, expel, exile. έλαύνω (έλα: 47^), έλώ (έλά-σω), ήλασα, έλήλακα (98.1c) [elastic], drive, ride, march. έλεος, ου, ό [eleemosynary, alms], pity. έλλειψις, εως, ή, (έν-λειπ-σις: 37°)> ellipse, a falling short, defect, deficiency. έντεΰθεν [ένταΰθα] (dem. pronom. adv.), hence, thence, thereupon.
έξ-ελαύνω, έξελώ, έξήλασα, έξελήλακα drive out, march on. εξις (σεχ-σις: 373), εως, ή [£χω have, be hectic], a having, state or habit of body or of mind, HABITUS. ίππεύς, έως, ό [ίππος], horseman knight. Ιχθύς, ύος, ό (epicene) [ichthyology] fish. κάθαρσις, εως, ή [καθαιρώ (καΟαρ' purify, cathartic], purification evacuation. ναΰς, νεώς, ή [nautical, nausea], ship Lat.
Ν AVIS.
παΐς, παιδός, ό, ή [pedagogue, orthopaedic], child, boy, girl (398). πόλις, εως, ή [acropolis, metropolis, necropolis, cosmopolitan], state, city. πραξις (πραγ-σις), εο^ς, ή [πράττω, practice], a doing, a doing well or ill. τάξις (ταγ-σις), εως, ή [τάττω], arrangement, order, division, battle line. τραγωδία, ας, ή [τράγος he-goat + ώδός (from αοιδός) singer], t r a g e d y , φύσις, εως, ή [φϋω], nature, thing, entity, NATURA
131. (l) τούς ιππέας έκ του άστεως έξέβαλεν ό βασιλεύς. έξις κακή ήν.
(4) εντεύθεν έξήλαυνον ήμέρας δέκα έπι τόν ποταμον. γυναίκας λίθοις έβαλλον.
(5) αί δέ παίδες τας
(6) ομως δ' ιππέων τάξις εις την χώράν έλήλακεν.
(7) αλλ* ή γραΰς έλαύνει τάς βοΰς εις τό άστυ. και ονομάτων.
(2) ή της ψυχής
(3) οί δέ γέροντες και αί γράες έν τή πόλει μεμενήκασιν.
(8) ελλειψις ήν ρημάτων τε
(9) φύσει νόμος βασιλεύς άνθρώπων.
φόβου περαίνει ή τραγωδία τήν των παθημάτων κάθαρσιν.
( ί ο ) δι' έλέου και
AN
59
INTRODUCTION
132. (II) W h e n t h e y w e r e p r e p a r i n g their ships f o r (εις) b a t t l e , g e n e r a l did not hinder.
(12) W e r e there f i s h in t h e w a t e r ?
of t h e k i n g ' s a c t i o n s w e r e h o n o r a b l e , s o m e [were] not. the o x e n o u t of t h e ship i n t o the sea. o x e n in t h e ship!
(14) W e t h r e w
(15) B u t s u r e l y there w e r e n o
(16) P i t y a n d f e a r are a f f e c t i o n s of t h e soul.
Are y o u writing about Greek tragedy ?
the
(13) S o m e
(17)
(18) T h e w o m e n s a y t h e o l d
m a n is a thief.
(19) T h e old w o m a n h a s n o t e d u c a t e d either her sons or
her daughters.
(20) T h e k i n g s a y s h e h a d n o ships.
XIX. Ω VERBS Indicative
of Perfect
Middle
System
Προς κέντρα μή λάκτιζε. Αισχύλου 'Αγαμέμνονος 1624. Kick not against the pricks.
1 3 3 . T h e m i d d l e v o i c e (31) i n d i c a t e s a c t i o n on oneself (παύομαι I myself,
w h e r e a s t h e p a s s i v e παύομαι m e a n s I am stopped),
(αγοράζομαι I buy for myself),
or on something belonging
σκευάζομαι τά πλοΐ'α I prepare
my
stop
for
oneself
to oneself
(παρα-
boats).
T h e p e r f e c t m i d d l e s y s t e m comprises the p e r f e c t m i d d l e a n d p a s s i v e , t h e p l u p e r f e c t m i d d l e a n d p a s s i v e , a n d the f u t u r e p e r f e c t m i d d l e a n d passive. 1 3 4 . T h e p e r f e c t i n d i c a t i v e m i d d l e a n d p a s s i v e is m a d e u p of
redu-
plication (98.1), v e r b s t e m , a n d p r i m a r y m i d d l e p e r s o n a l endings (474). T h e p e r f e c t middle tense s t e m is πεπαιδευ. παιδεύω
(παιδευ)
ΐα'τρεύω
(ιατρευ)
όρύττω (ορυχ) dig
πε-παίδευ-μαι
ϊάτρευ-μαι
ορ-ώρυγ-μαι
(137)
πε-παίδευ-σαι
Ιατρευ-σαι
όρ-ώρυξαι
πε-παίδευ-ται
ϊάτρευ-ται
όρ-ώρυκ-ται
πε-παίδευ-σθον
ϊάτρευ-σθον
όρ-ώρυχ- θον
πε-παίδευ-σθον
Τατρευ-σθον
όρ-ώρυχ- θον
πε-παιδεύ-μεθα
ϊατρεύ-μεθα
όρ-ωρύγ-μεΟα
πε-παίδευ-σθε
ΐάτρευ-σθε
ορ-ώρυχ- θε
πε- παίδευ-νται
ιάτρευ-νται
δρ-ωρυγ-μένοι είσί(ν]
135. T h e p l u p e r f e c t i n d i c a t i v e m i d d l e a n d p a s s i v e is m a d e u p of a u g m e n t (if the r e d u p l i c a t e d p e r f e c t b e g i n s w i t h a c o n s o n a n t or if, h a v i n g " A t t i c " reduplication [98.1.0], it b e g i n s w i t h α or 0), r e d u p l i c a t i o n , v e r b s t e m , a n d s e c o n d a r y m i d d l e personal endings (474). έ-πε-παιδεύ-μην
Ιατρευ-μην
ωρ-ωρυγ-μην
έ-πε-παίδευ-σο
ΐάτρευ-σο
ώρ-ώρυξα
έ-πε-π αίδευ-το
ΐατρευ-το
ώρ-ώρυκ-το 6ο
(137)
AN
INTRODUCTION
61
έ-πε-παίδευ-σθον
ιάτρευ-σθον
ώρ-ώρυχ- θον
έ-πε-παιδεύ-σθην
ϊάτρεύ-σθην
ώρ-ωρύχ- Οην
| -πε -παιδεύ -μεθα
ϊατρεύ-μεθα
ώρ-ωρύγ-μεθα
έ-πε-παίδευ-σθε
ΐάτρευ-σθε
ώρ-ώρυχ- Οε
έ-πε-παίδευ-ντο
ΐάτρευ-ντο
όρ-ωρυγ-μένοι ήσαν
1 3 6 . T h e f u t u r e p e r f e c t i n d i c a t i v e m i d d l e a n d passive
(this tense is
l a c k i n g in regular v e r b s w h o s e s t e m s e n d in λ, ν, or ρ 1 ) is m a d e up of reduplication, v e r b s t e m (a short f i n a l v o w e l of t h e p e r f e c t m i d d l e tense s t e m b e i n g l e n g t h e n e d : e.g. λελΰσομαι f r o m λελυ, tense sign (σ), t h e m a t i c v o w e l ( E /o), a n d p r i m a r y m i d d l e p e r s o n a l endings (474). πε-παιδεύ-σ--ο--μαι
ΐάτρεύ-σ--ο·-μαι
όρ-ωρύξ-ο-μαι
πε-παιδεύ-σ- -ϊ] (-ε-σαι),
ΐάτρεύ-σ- •7] (-ε-σαι),
όρ-ωρύξ-η (-ε-α
πε-παιδεύ -σ -ει
ΐατρεύ -σ -ει
όρ-ωρύξ-ει
πε-παιδεύ-σ--ε--ται
ϊατρεύ-σ--ε--ται
όρ-ωρύξ-ε-ται
πε-παιδεύ-σ--ε--σθον
ΐατρεύ-σ--ε--σθον
όρ-ωρύξ-ε-σθον
πε-παιδεύ-σ--ε--σθον
• Ιατρεύ-σ-~ε -σθον
ορ-ωρύς-ε-σθον
t
πε-παιδευ-σ- -ο--μεθα
ΐατρευ-σ--ό -μεθα
όρ-ωρυξ-ό-μεθα
πε-παιδεύ-σ--ε--σθε
ϊάτρεύ-σ--ε-•σθε
όρ-ωρύξ-ε-σθε
πε-παιδεύ-σ--ο--νται
1 -
όρ-ωρύξ-ο-νται
1
ιατρευ-σ-•ο--νται
1 3 7 , I n v e r b s w h o s e s t e m s end in m u t e s the perfect a n d
pluperfect
i n d i c a t i v e s m i d d l e a n d p a s s i v e are as f o l l o w s : πέμπω
(πεμπ)
(πέ-πεμπ-μαι)
πε-πεμ -μαι
(ε-πε-πεμπ-μην)
ε-πε-πεμ -μην
(πέ-πεμπ-σαι)
πέ-πεμψαι
(έ-πέ-πεμπ-σο)
έ-πέ-πεμψο έ-πέ-πεμπ-το
πέ-πεμπ-ται (πέ-πεμπ-σθον)
πέ-πεμφ- θον
(έ-πέ-πεμπ-σθον)
έ-πέ-πεμφ- θον
(πέ-πεμπ-σθον)
πέ-πεμφ- Gov
(έ-πε-πέμπ-σθην)
έ-πε-πέμφ- Οην
(πε-πέμπ-μεθα)
πε-πέμ -μεθα
(έ-πε-πέμπ-μεθα)
έ-πε-πέμ -μεθα
(πέ-πεμπ-σθε)
πέ-πεμφ- θε
(έ-πέ-πεμπ-σθε)
έ-πέ-πεμφ- θε
(πέ-πεμπ-νται)
πε-πεμ -μένοι
(έ-πέ-πεμπ-ντο)
είσί (ν)
πε-πεμ -μένοι ήσαν
ι . I n these verbs—and i n d e e d in all v e r b s — t h e f u t . pf. mid. and pass, m a y be expressed b y t h e pf. p t c . m i d . a n d pass, used w i t h t h e f u t . of t h e v e r b ειμί (470).
7 2
PHILOSOPHICAL
GREEK
δοκέω (Box) (δέ-δοκ-μαο)
δέ-δογ-μαι
(έ-δε-δόκ-μην)
έ-δε-δόγ-μην
(δέ-δοκ-σαί.)
δέ-δοξαι
(έ-δέ-δοκ-σο)
έ-δέ-δοξο έ-δέ-δοκ-το
δέ-δοκ-ται δέ-δοχ- θον
(δέ-δοκ-σθον) (δέ-δοκ-σθον)
δέ-δοχ- θον
(δε-δόκ-μεθα)
δε-δόγ-μεθα
(δέ-δοκ-σθε)
δέ-δοχ- θε δε-δογ-μένοι
(δέ-δοκ-νται)
(έ-δέ-δοκ-σθον) (έ-δε-δόκ-σθην)
έ-δέ-δοχ- θον
(έ-δε-δόκ-μεθα) (έ-δέ-δοκ-σθε)
έ-δε-δόγ-μεθα έ-δέ-δοχ- θε
(έ-δέ-δοκ-ντο)
ζισί (ν)
έ-δε-δόχ- θην
δε-δογ-μένοι ήσαν
φράζω (φραδ) πε-φρασ-μαι
έ-πε-φράδ-μην)
έ-πε-φράσ-μην
(πέ-φραδ-σαι)
πέ-φρα -σοα
έ-πέ-φραδ-σο)
έ-πέ-φρα -σο
(πέ-φραδ-ται)
πέ-φρασ-ται
έ-πέ-φραδ-το)
έ-πέ-φρασ-το
(πέ-φραδ-σθον)
πέ-φρασ- θον
έ-πέ-φραδ-σθον)
έ-πέ-φρασ- θον
(πέ-φραδ-σθον)
πέ-φρασ- θον
έ-πε-φράδ-σθην)
έ-πε-φράσ- θην
(πε-φράδ-μεθα)
πε-φράσ-μεθα
έ-πε-φράδ-μεθα)
έ-πε-φράσ-μεθα έ-πέ-φρασ- θε
(πέ-φραδ-μαι)
(πέ-φραδ-σθε)
πε-φρασ- θε
έ-πέ-φραδ-σθε)
(πέ-φραδ-νται)
πε-φρασ-μένοι
έ-πέ-φραδ-ντο)
ττε-φρασ-μένοι ήσαν
είσί(ν)
1 3 8 . In verbs whose stems end in λ, ν; or ρ the perfect and p l u p e r f e c t indicatives middle and passive are as f o l l o w s : άγγέλλο) (άγγελ) ήγγελ-μαι
ήγγέλ-μην
ήγγελ-σαι.
ήγγελ-σο
ήγγελ τται.
ήγγελ-το
(ήγγελ-σθον)
ήγγελ- θον
(ήγγελ-σθον)
ήγγελ- θον
(ήγγελ-σθε) (ήγγελ-νται)
ήγγέλ-μεθα ήγγελ- θε ήγγελ-μένοι είσί(ν)
(ήγγελ-σθον) (ήγγέλ-σθην)
ήγγελ- θον
(ήγγελ-σθε)
ήγγελ- θε
(ήγγελ-ντο)
ήγγελ-μένος
ήγγέλ- θην ήγγέλ-μεθα
AN
INTRODUCTION
63
φαίνο) (φαν) (πέ-φαν-μαι) (πέ-φαν-σαι)
πέ·-φασ-μαι πε·-φασ-μένος εΐ
(έ·-πε·-φάν-μην) (έ -πέ·-φαν-σο)
έ·-πε-φάσ-μην πε-φασ-μένος ήσθα ?
πέ·-φαν-ταί, (πέ-φαν-σθον)
ε·-πέ-φαν-το
!
?
(πέ-φαν-σθον)
πε·-φαν- θον πέ -φαν- θον
(έ'-πέ·-φαν-σΟον) (έ·-πε--φάν-σθην)
ε·-πέ-φαν- θον Ϊ ε--πε-φάν- θην
(πε-φάν-μεθα)
πε·-φάσ-μεθα
(πέ-φαν-σθε) (πέ-φαν-νται)
πέ--φαν- θε
(έ·-πε--φάν-μεθα) (έ--πέ--φαν-σθε)
έ·-πε-φάσ-μεθα s ε--πέ-φαν- θε
πε·-φασ-μένοί είσί(ν)
/
(έ--πε--φαν-ντο)
πε-φασ-μέναι ήσαν
φθείρω (φθαρ)
(έ-φθαρ-σθον) (έ-φθαρ-σθον)
ε-φθαρ-μαι
έ-φθάρ-μην
έ-φθαρ-σαι
ε-φθαρ-σο
έ-φθαρ-ται
έ-φθαρ-το
έ-φθαρ- θον ε-φθαρ- θον
(έ-φθαρ-σθον) (έ-φθάρ-σθην)
έ-φθάρ-μεθα
3- θον έ-φθάρ- θην έ-φθάρ-μεθα
(ε-φθαρ ~σθε)
έ'-φθαρ- θε
(e-<j Ιαρ-σθε)
ε-φθαρ- θε
(έ-φθαρ-νται)
έ-φθαρ-μένοι
(ί-<\ )αρ-ντο)
ε-φθαρ-μένοι
είσί(ν)
ήσαν
1 3 9 , T h e infinitive of the perfect middle and passive is formed b y adding σθοα t o the perfect middle tense s t e m : πεπαιδευ-σθαι, ΐάτρεΰ-σθαι, όρωρύχθαι, πεπέμφ-θαι, δεδιώχ-θαι, πεφράσ-θαι, ήγγέλ-θαι, πεφάν-θαι, έφθάρ-θαι; accent a l w a y s on penult. T h e infinitive of the future perfect middle and passive is formed b y adding σ-ε-σθαι to the perfect middle tense stem (a short final vowel being lengthened: 136): πεπαιδεύ-σ-ε-σθαι, ίατρεύ-σ-εσθαι, πεπέμψ-ε-σθαι, δεδιώξ-ε-σθαι, πεφρά-σ^ε-σθαι, λελϋ-σ-ε-σθαι. 1 4 0 . N o t e the following consonant changes: (1) Before μ a π - m u t e is assimilated, a κ-mute becomes or remains γ , and a τ - m u t e becomes a. (2) μπμ gives μμμ, then μμ. (3) σ between consonants is dropped.
72
PHILOSOPHICAL
GREEK
{4) A π - m u t e a n d a f o l l o w i n g σ a r e w r i t t e n ψ, a χ - m u t e a n d a
following
σ a r e w r i t t e n ξ ; a τ - m u t e is a s s i m i l a t e d t o a f o l l o w i n g σ a n d o n e σ is (5)
then
dropped.
B e f o r e τ a π - m u t e b e c o m e s or r e m a i n s π, a κ-rrrate b e c o m e s or r e m a i n s κ, a n d a τ - m u t e b e c o m e s σ (356, 3 5 7 ) .
(6) B e f o r e μ t h e f i n a l ν of a v e r b s t e m i s r e p l a c e d b y σ ( 3 6 8 ) . T h e r e a s o n s for s o m e of t h e s e c h a n g e s a r e i n d i c a t e d in T a b l e I, p.
141.
I n v e r b s w h o s e s t e m s e n d in a c o n s o n a n t the third persons
perfect a n d pluperfect m i d d l e a n d passive are periphrastic f o r m s u p of t h e n o m i n a t i v e p l u r a l o f t h e p e r f e c t m i d d l e a n d p a s s i v e (171)
and the
verb
ειμί
plural made
participle
(470).
VOCABULARY
142.
ήεί or άεί [ L a t . AEVUM] (adv.), always, EVER, AYE, on any particular occasion, δπτω (άφ: 477), άψω, ήψα, ήμμαι, fasten1, mid., fasten oneself to, grasp, touch, TANGO (with . p a r t i t . gen.), άψή, ής, ή, touch, TACTUS, βίος, ου, ό [ b i o l o g y , VITA], life, way of life, VITA. γυμνάζω (477), γυμνάσω, έγύμνασα, γεγύμνακα, γεγύμνασμαι [γυμνός naked, lightly clad~], train naked, exercise (trans.). γυμναστική, ής, ή (sc. τέχνη), g y m nastics. γυμνικός, ή, όν, of or for g y m n a s t i c exercises. διά (prep.), through (spatial, t e m p o r a l , or m e d i a t i v e , w i t h g e n . ) ; on account of (with acc.). δια-λείπω, διαλείψω, διέλιπον, διαλέλοιπα, διαλέλειμμαι, intermit (with a c c . ) ; he discontinuous (with p t c . ) ; stand at intervals. δια-τρίβω (τρΐβ, τριβ), διατρίψω, διέτρΐψα, δοατέτριφα, διατέτρομμαι [ d i a t r i b e ] , rub through, waste, delay. 143,
4.
(1)
έγύμναζον
ομως τούς
δ' ο ύ π ω 'ίππους
έκ-πλήττω, εκπλήξω, εξέπληξα, εκπέπληγα, έκπέπληγμαι [ a p o p l e x y ] , strike out of one's senses, amaze, frighten. εΰ [ e u l o g y ] (serves as a d v . of άγαΟός), well. ή ( d i s j u n c t i v e c o n j . ) , or; ή . . .ή, either . . . or. ή (conj.), than (216). μετα-πέμπω, μεταπέμψω, μετέπεμψα, μεταπέπομφα, μεταπέπεμμαι (act. or m i d . ) , send after (to g e t ) , send for. οϋπω (adv.), not yet. π ώ (indef. pronom,. a d v . , encl.), up to this time, yet, π ώ ς (interrog. p r o n o m . a d v . ) , how. πώς (indef. p r o n o m . adv., encl,), somehow. φύλαξ, ακος, ό, ή [φυλακή], watcher, guard. φυλάττω (φυλακ-γω: 4 7 7 ) ; φυλάξω, έφύλαξα, πεφύλαχα, πεφύλαγμαι, guard. ψεϋδος (ψευδεσ), ους, τό [pseudonym], falsehood. ψεύδω, ψεύσω, έψευσα, εψευσμαι, deceive; mid., say falsely.
μεταπεπεμμένοι οι
ηγεμόνες.
(3)
εΐσίν
οί
νέοι
ψεύδονται
φύλακες.
ούν
οί
(2)
άεί
παιδοτρίβαι;
(4) διά τ η ν τ ο υ νεάνίου έ π ι σ τ ο λ ή ν φ υ λ ά ξ ο μ έ ν π ω ς τ ά ς τ ε γ ρ α ύ ς κ α ι τ ά τ έ κ ν α . (5)
έκπεπληγμέναι
ή σ α ν αί τ ω ν
φυλάκων
θυγατέρες.
(6) π ώ ς ϊ ά τ ρ ε υ ο ν
οί
AN 3
\
1
*
~
/
/
\
INTRODUCTION \
65 3
ίάτροι τους εν τή νησω; (7) κακα τά ψεύδη. (8) αεί βίος εστίν και ού διαλείπει,. (9) τοις τε γάρ άνθρώποις και τοις Οηρίοις εστίν ή άφή. (ίο) των της μητρός γονάτων ήπται ή παις. 1 4 4 . ( Ϊ Ι ) T h e g u a r d is either delaying or frightened. (12) T h e c o w s a n d the other animals are doing well. (13) There were no ("there were n o t " ) g y m n a s t i c games in the Greek villages. (14) G y m n a s t i c s is a noble art. (15) W e h a v e been well trained. (16) H a v e the citizens d e l a y e d on account of the w a r ? (17) H e will be a cithara p l a y e r as long as he lives ( " t h r o u g h life"). (18) B u t w a s he an orator? (19) Y o u Have not y e t sent for y o u r possessions. (20) There were not y e t strangers on the small island.
XXVI. Ω-VERBS Present,
Imperfect,
Future,
and Aorist
Indicative
Middle
and
Passive
Ό
βίος βραχύς, ή δέ τέχνη μακρή. Έ κ των 'Ιπποκράτους 'Αφορισμών i. ι . Life is short and the art long.
1 4 5 . T h e present i n d i c a t i v e m i d d l e a n d p a s s i v e a n d f u t u r e i n d i c a t i v e m i d d l e are m a d e u p of present a n d f u t u r e stems r e s p e c t i v e l y
(34,
48)
a n d p r i m a r y m i d d l e endings (474), παιδεύ-σ-ο-μαι
παιδεύ-ο-μαι παιδεύ-η (-ε-σαι)
παιδεύ-ει
παιδεύ-σ-η (-ε-σαι)
παιδεύ-ε-ται
παιδεύ-σ-ε-ται
παιδεύ-ε-σθον
παιδεύ-σ-ε-σθον
παιδεύ-ε-σθον
παιδεύ-σ-ε-σθον
παιδευ-ό-μεθα
παιδευ-σ-ό-μεθα
παιδεύ-ε-σθε
παιδεύ-σ-ε-σθε
παιδεύ-ο-νται
παιδεύ-σ-ο-νται
παιδεύ-σ-ει
(Similarly πέμπ-ο-μαι, [πέμπ-σ-ο-μαι] πέμψ-ο-μαι; διώκ-ο-μαι, [διώκ-σ-ομαι] διώξ-ο-μαι; φράζ-ο-μαι, [φράδ-σ-ο-μαι] φράσ-ο-μαι; τείν-ο-μαι,
[τεν-
έσ-ο-μαι] τενού-μαι. I n t h e second person singular the σ of t h e p e r s o n a l e n d i n g disappears b e t w e e n v o w e l s [375].) 1 4 6 . T h e i m p e r f e c t i n d i c a t i v e m i d d l e a n d p a s s i v e a n d aorist i n d i c a t i v e m i d d l e are m a d e u p of a u g m e n t , p r e s e n t a n d aorist s t e m s r e s p e c t i v e l y (34, 86), a n d s e c o n d a r y m i d d l e endings (474)· έ-παιδευ-ό-μην
έ-παιδευ-σά-μην
έ-παιδεύ-ου
έ-παιδεύ-σω
(-ε-σο)
(-σα-σο)
έ-λιπ-ό-μην έ-λίπ-ου (-ε-σο)
έ-παιδεύ-ε-το
έ-παιδεύ-σα-το
έ-λίπ-ε-το
έ-παιδεύ-ε-σθον
έ-παιδεύ-σα-σθον
έ-λίπ-ε-σΟον
έ-παιδευ-έ-σθην
έ-παιδευ-σά-σθην
έ-λιπ-έ-σθην
έ-παιδευ-ό-μεθα
έ-παιδευ-σά-μεθα
έ-λιπ-ό-μεθα
ε-παιδεύ-ε-σθε
έ-παιδεύ-σα-σθε
έ-λίπ-ε-σθε
έ-παιδεύ-ο-ντο
έ-παιδεύ-σα-ντο
έ-λίπ-ο-ντο
F o r t h e c o n t r a c t i o n s in t h e s e c o n d person singular see 123.3. 66
AN
67
INTRODUCTION
1 4 7 . O n l y in f u t u r e a n d aorist are p a s s i v e f o r m s d i f f e r e n t f r o m m i d d l e . T h e aorist i n d i c a t i v e p a s s i v e is m a d e u p of a u g m e n t , v e r b s t e m , tense s i g n (θη in first aorists p a s s i v e , η in second aorists p a s s i v e ) , a n d s e c o n d a r y active endings (474). T h e first aorist p a s s i v e tense s t e m is παιδευθη; the second aorist p a s s i v e tense s t e m is έκ-πλαγη. έξ-ε-πλάγ-η-ν
έ-παιδεύ-θη-ν έ-παιδεύ-θη-ς
έξ-ε-πλάγ-η-c
έ-παιδεύ-θη
έξ-ε-πλάγ-η
έ-παιδεύ-Οη -τον
έξ-ε-πλάγ-η-τον
έ-παιδευ-θή-την
έξ-ε-πλαγ-ή-την
έ-παιδεύ-θη-μεν
έξ-ε-πλάγ-η-μεν
έ -παιδεύ -θη -τε
έξ-ε-πλάγ-η-τε
έ-παιδεύ-θη-σαν
εξ-ε-πλάγ-η - σαν
(Similarly
έ-λείφ-θη-ν, έ-διώχ-θη-ν, ήλπίσ-θη-ν.
Before 0 π-mutes
and
κ - m u t e s b e c o m e or r e m a i n r o u g h [356]; τ - m u t c s b c c o m e σ [357].) T h e f u t u r e i n d i c a t i v e p a s s i v e is m a d e u p of v e r b s t e m (in t h e s a m e f o r m as in t h e aorist i n d i c a t i v e passive), aorist tense sign (θη in first f u t u r e s passive, η in s e c o n d f u t u r e s passive),
f u t u r e tense sign
t h e m a t i c v o w e l (E/o), a n d p r i m a r y middle endings παιδευ-θή-σ-ο-μαι
έκ-πλαγ-ή-σ-ο-μαι
παιδευ-θή-σ-η (-ε-σαι),
έκ-πλαγ-ή-σ-η
παιδευ-θή-σ-ει παιδευ-θή-σ-ε-ται
(σ),
(474).
(-ε-σαι),
έκ-πλαγ-ή-σ-ει έκ-πλαγ-ή-σ-ε-ται
παιδευ-θή-σ-ε-σθον
έκ-πλαγ-ή-σ-ε-σθον
παιδευ-θή-σ-ε-σθον
έκ-πλαγ-ή-σ-ε-σθον
παιδευ-θη-σ-ό-μεθα
έκ-πλαγ-η-σ-ό-μεθα
παιδευ-θή-σ-ε-σθε
έκ-πλαγ-ή-σ-ε-σθε
παιδευ-θή-σ-ο-νται
έκ-πλαγ-ή-σ-ο-νται
1 4 8 . T h e i n f i n i t i v e of t h e aorist p a s s i v e is f o r m e d b y a d d i n g the a c t i v e e n d i n g ναι to t h e tense s t e m : παιδευθή-ναι, έκπλαγή-ναι; a c c e n t on penult. T h e
other m i d d l e
always
and p a s s i v e i n f i n i t i v e s are f o r m e d
by
a d d i n g σθαι t o t h e tense s t e m : παιδεύε-σθαι, παιδεύσε-σθαι, παιδεύσα-σθαι, λιπέ-σθαι, πεπαιδευ-σθαι, πεπαιδεύσε-σθαι, παιδευθήσε-σθαι, έκπλαγήσε-σθαι.
72
PHILOSOPHICAL
GREEK
1 4 9 . T h e p r i n c i p a l p a r t s (32) of t h e recent p a r a d i g m v e r b s are as f o l l o w s : πεπαίδευμαι
έπαιδεύθην
δεδίωχα
δεδίωγμαι
έδιώχθην
εφρασα
πέφρακα
πέφρασμαι
έφράσΟην
λείψω
έλιπον
λέλοίπα
λέλειμμαι
έλείφθην
άγγελώ
ήγγειλα
ήγγελκα
ήγγελμαι
ήγγέλθην
φανώ
εφηνα
πέφαγκα
πέφασμαι
έφάνθην or
έφθαρμαι
έφθάρην ώρύχθην
παιδεύω
παιδεύσω
έπαίδευσα πεπαίδευκα
ΐάτρεύω
ΐάτρεύσω
ΐάτρευσα
ΐάτρευκα
διώκω
διώξω
έδιωξα
φράζω
φράσω
λείπω άγγέλλω φαίνω
έφάνην
πέφηνα φθείρω
φθερώ
έφθειρα
έφθαρκα
όρύττω
όρύξω
ώρυξα
όρώρυχα
όρώρυγμαι
λΰω εκπλήττω
λΰσω
έλυσα
λέλυκοο
λέλυμαι
έλύθην
εκπλήξω
εξέπληξα
έκπέπληγα
έκπέπληγμαι
έξεπλήχΟην or έξεπλάγην
1 5 0 . D e p o n e n t v e r b s l a c k a c t i v e f o r m s b u t h a v e a c t i v e sense. If t h e y h a v e a m i d d l e aorist, t h e y are called middle, deponents p a r t s are present
indicative middle,
a n d their p r i n c i p a l
future indicative middle,
aorist
i n d i c a t i v e middle, p e r f e c t i n d i c a t i v e m i d d l e : αισθάνομαι perceive,
αίσΟήσομαι, ήσΟόμην, ήσθημαι.
If a d e p o n e n t h a s n o t o n l y a m i d d l e aorist b u t also a p a s s i v e aorist, t h e l a t t e r h a s p a s s i v e sense: δέχομαι receive,
δέξομαι, έδεξάμην, δέδεγ|χα<·, έδέχθην I was
received.
If d e p o n e n t s h a v e n o aorist e x c e p t t h e passive, t h e y are called deponents
passive
a n d the aorist is g i v e n a f t e r the p e r f e c t :
βούλομαι, wish, βουλήσομαι, βεβούλημαι, έβουλήθην I
wished.
151. W i t h p a s s i v e v e r b s t h e a g e n t is expressed b y ύπό a n d the g e n i t i v e ; if t h e tense is p e r f e c t or p l u p e r f e c t , the a g e n t m a y be e x p r e s s e d b y t h e d a t i v e of interest γυναιξί βεβούλευται 152.
(327.2): υπό παιδοτρίβου γυμνάζονται οί παίδες; ταΐς (impersonal). VOCABULARY
άπ-εργάζομαι (477 )> άπεργάσομαι, άπηργασάμην, άτίείργασμαι (FzFz = ε ε = ει), άττηργάσθην [fέργον], finish o f f , complete, make so and so. βούλομαι (βουλ. βουλή), βουλήσομαι., βεβούλημαι, έβουλήθην, wish, have a tendency (with inf.).
δ έ χ ο μ α ι , δέξομαι, έδεξάμην, δέδεγμαι, έδέχθην, receive. κ α τ ά [ c a t a s t r o p h e ] (prep.), down from, in respect of (with g e n . ) ; down along, along, according to (with acc.). μηδέ (copul. c o n j . ) , and not, nor\ as a d v . , not even, not. . . either.
AN
INTRODUCTION
μ η κ έ τ ι (adv.), no longer. ο λ ί γ ο ς , η, ov [ o l i g a r c h y ] , little, few; ολίγον (acc. as a d v . ) . a little. ουδέ (c opul. c o n j . ) , and not, nor; as a d v . , not even, not. . . either (p. 178, n o t e 8). ο ύ κ έ τ ι (adv.), no longer. π/] ( i n t e r r o g . p r o n o m . a d v . ) , which way. nf\ (in d e f . p r o n o m . a d v . , encl.), some way. π λ η γ ή , ής, ή [πλήττω], blow, stroke. π ό τ ε (interrog. p r o n o m . a d v . ) , when. π ο τ έ (indef. p r o n o m . a d v . , encl.), sometime, ever, once.
69
π ο ύ (indef. p r o n o m . a d v . , encl.), somewhere . υ π έ ρ [ h y p e r b o l e , L a t . SUPER] (prep.), OVER, in behalf
of ( w i t h g e n . ) ; OVER,
beyond (with acc.). ύ π ό [ h y p o t h e s i s , L a t . SUB] (prep.), under, by (denoting a g e n c y w i t h pass, v b s . ; w i t h g e n . ) ; under (with d a t . ) ; to a -place under (with acc.). χρόνος, ου, ό [ c h r o n o m e t e r ] , time; διά χρόνου, after some time. ώ ρ α , ας, ή [ h o r o s c o p e , YEAR], season, HOUR,
Lat.
HORA.
153. (1) παιδευόμεΟα ύπό των τε πατέρων και των μητέρο^ν. (2) έλέγοντο οί ίππής ούκέτι γυμνάζεσθαι (286). (3) τότε δέ υπέρ πόλεων ολίγων και κακών ή ν 6 άγών. (4) ούτε ήβροισμένοι ήσαν οί ίππής ούτε γεγυμνασμένοι. (5) ή μεν τέχνη ρήτορας άπείργασται, ή δέ φύσις οΰ. (6) δέδεχΟε έπιστολάς; (7) ούδ' έβουλήθητέ ποτε μηκέτι γυμνάζεσθαι; (8) πότε δ' έπεπαίδευσΟε ύπό του (gcneric article) χρόνου; (9) ούκέτι δ' ώρα παρά ταΐς γυναιξί ypovov διατριβειν. (ίο) κατά την όδόν που ήλαυνον τας βοΰς. 1 5 4 . ( ι ι ) H e did not complete his work, nor did he receive gifts. (12) D i d y o u order the physician to treat the strangers and not to send t h e m away?
(13) H e will wish neither to send gifts nor to receive [them].
(14) W h i c h w a y were t h e guards m a r c h i n g ? the a n i m a l s some w a y .
(15) W e will bring b a c k
(16) In battle we receive ( " h a v e " ) blows.
W i l l n o t t h e physician sometime cure his d a u g h t e r ? tree t h e r e arc roots.
(17)
(18) U n d e r the
(19) T h e receptacle w a s completed in little time.
(20) He s a y s that the slaves will no longer receive food.
X X L PRONOUNS Intensive
and Demonstrative
Pronouns GL πλείστοι κακοί. Βίας. Most men are bad,
155. T h e i n t e n s i v e p r o n o u n is αύτός (431), w h i c h is i n f l e c t e d like στενός (42) e x c e p t t h a t i t h a s no v o c a t i v e f o r m s a n d t h a t it h a s αυτό (not αυτόν) in n o m i n a t i v e a n d a c c u s a t i v e singular n e u t e r , αύτός h a s three u s e s : (1) I n t e n s i v e p r o n o u n m e a n i n g self a n d s t a n d i n g in p r e d i c a t e p o s i t i o n : ή θέα αυτή the sight itself, αυτή ή πείρα the attempt itself, αύτός κλέπτει he himself is stealing;
in the l a s t case αύτός intensifies an u n d e r s t o o d
subject. (2) A d j e c t i v e m e a n i n g same a n d s t a n d i n g in a t t r i b u t i v e p o s i t i o n : ή αύτη θρίξ the same
hair.
(3) W e a k d e m o n s t r a t i v e p r o n o u n s u p p l y i n g , e x c e p t in t h e n o m i n a t i v e , t h e l a c k of a p e r s o n a l p r o n o u n of t h e t h i r d p e r s o n :
μετεπέπεμψο
αύτόν you had sent for him, έδεξάμεθα αυτήν we received her, ή ναΰς αυτών ( a l w a y s in p r e d i c a t e position) their
ship.
1 5 6 . T h e d e m o n s t r a t i v e p r o n o m i n a l a d j e c t i v e ούτος this, the
aforesaid,
is i n f l e c t e d as f o l l o w s : ούτος
αΰτη
τοΰτο
τούτου
ταύτης
τούτου
τούτω
ταύτη
τούτω
τούτον
ταύτην
τοΰτο
τούτω
τούτω
τούτω
τούτοιν
τούτοιν
τούτοιν
ούτοι
αύται
ταΰτα
τούτων
τούτων
τούτων
τούτοις
ταύτα ι ς
τούτοις
τούτους
ταύτας
ταΰτα
N o t e t h a t (1) it h a s n o v o c a t i v e f o r m s ; (2) it h a s n o d i s t i n c t i v e f e m inine f o r m s in t h e d u a l ; (3) it h a s t h e r o u g h b r e a t h i n g in t h e 70
same
AN
INTRODUCTION
71
cases as t h e a r t i c l e ; (4) it h a s ούτ or τουτ b e f o r e an o-sound, αύτ or ταυτ elsewhere. 157. The demonstrative
p r o n o m i n a l a d j e c t i v e δδε this,
is inflected like t h e article
(42) + δέ e x c e p t t h a t all i t s
the
following,
nominatives
h a v e a c u t e accents. δδε
ήδε
τόδε
τοϋδε
τήσδε
τούδε
τωδε
τήδε
τωδε
τόνδε
τήνδε
τόδε
τώ·δε
τώδε
τώδε
τοΐνδε
τοίνδε
τοΐνδε
ο'ίδε
α'ίδε
τάδε
των δε
των 5ε
τώνδε
τοΐσδε
ταΐσδε
τοισδε
τούσδε
τάσδε
τάδε
158. T h e d e m o n s t r a t i v e p r o n o m i n a l a d j e c t i v e εκείνος
that is i n f l e c t e d
like δήλος (75) e x c e p t t h a t (1) it has n o v o c a t i v e f o r m s ; (2) it h a s n o d i s t i n c t i v e f e m i n i n e f o r m s in t h e d u a l ; (3) it has έκεΐνο (not εκείνον) in n o m i n a t i v e a n d a c c u s a t i v e singular n e u t e r . εκείνος
έκείνη
έκεΐνο
εκείνου
εκείνης
εκείνου
έκείνω
έκείνη
έκείνω
εκείνον
εκείνην
εκείνο
έκείνω εκείνο!, ν
έκείνω
έκείνω
εκείνο ιν
έκείνοιν
έκεΐνοι έκείνων
έκεΐνοα
εκείνα
έκείνων
έκείνων
εκείνο ις
έκείναις
εκείνο ις
εκείνους
έκείνάς
έκεϊνα
159. ούτος, οδε, a n d εκείνος h a v e t w o u s e s : (1) A d j e c t i v a l , in p r e d i c a t e p o s i t i o n : αύτη ή νήσος this island m e n t i o n e d ) , τά ζωα τάδε these animals
(already
(to b e m e n t i o n e d ) , 6 δούλος
εκείνος that slave. N o t e t h a t in this usage the article m u s t be p r e s e n t .
PHILOSOPHICAL
72 (2)
P r o n o m i n a l : μετείχα
μεν τ ο ύ τ ω ν w e had a share
he will kill these women,
ϋφηνεν ε κ ε ί ν ο he wove
a t t r i b u t i v e p o s i t i o n ) σ ώ μ α this
woman's
a t t r i b u t i v e p o s i t i o n ) γ ό ν α τ α their
in this,
άποκτενεΐ τάσδε
that, τ ο τ α ύ τ η ς ( a l w a y s i n
body,
τά εκείνων
(always
in
knees.
VOCABULARY
160.
δδε, ήδε, τόδε [ώδε] (dem. p r o n o m . a d j . ) , this, the following. δλος, η, ov [ h o l o c a u s t , holograph, c a t h o l i c ] , whole, TOT US; δλως ( a d v . ) , wholly, altogether, in general. ούτος, αΰτη, τοΰτο [οΰτω] (dem. p r o n o m . adj.), the aforesaid. π ά λ ι ν [ p a l i n d r o m e , p a l i m p s e s t ] (adv.), back, again. πους, ποδός, Ό [ p o d a g r a , t r i p o d ] , FOOT, Lat. PES. σ ο φ ι σ τ ι κ ό ς , ή, όν [σοφός], of or for a sophist, sophistical; σοφι.στικώς (adv.), sophistically. a^pouXeOcjfsymbouleutic], plan with, advise (with d a t , of pers. a n d acc. of t h i n g ) ; mid,, consult with (with d a t . of pers.). σωτήρ, ήρος, ό [σώζω, soteriology], saviour. φ ι λ ο σ ο φ ί α , ας, ή, p h i l o s o p h y , P H I LOSOPH ΙΑ. φιλόσοφος, ον, p h i l o s o p h i c ; φιλόσοφος, ου, ό, p h i l o s o p h e r , PHILOSOPHUS.
α ύ τ ό ς , ή, ό [ a u t o p s y ] (intensive p r o n . ) , self; as a d j . , same; as w e a k dern. pron., him, her, it ( 1 5 5 ) ; αύτοΰ (adv.), there. έκεϊνος, η, ο (dem. p r o n o m . a d j . ) , that; έκείνως (adv.), -m that way. ήκω, ήξω, Λαυβ come. η μ έ ρ α , ας, ή [ h e m e r o l o g i u m , e p h e m e r a l ] , day. λα-μ-β-άν-ω (ληβ, λαβ *), λήψομαι, ελαβον, εϊληφα, εϊλημμαι, έλήφθην [ s y l l a b l e , c a t a l e p s y ] , take, capture, .sf e w e , understand; ληπτέος, α, ov (verb a l a d j . : 356), /o £><s taken. μάθησις, εως, ή [μανΟάνω], at/ of learning. μα-ν-Θ-άν-ω (μαΟ, μαθη), μαΟήσομαι, εμαθον, μεμάθηκα [mathematics], learn (with ace., p t c . in indir, disc., or δτι or ώς). μερ ιστός, ή, ον [μεριδ-τος (357Κ v e r b a l a d j . of μερίζω divide], divided, divisible (310). μέρος, ους, τό [ m e r i s m , polymeric], share, part; τά κατά μέρος, particulars.
161.
(1) τά
κάσιν
ούτοι
ζώα
μετέχει
τήνδε
τήν
πως
τάδε.
τών
διά
τήν
βοών.
σοφιστικοί, ή σ α ν ο ύ τ ο ι οί λ ό γ ο ι . εκείνος σωτήρ
ταύτης
τέχνην
ε ί λ ή φ ά σ ι ν οί π ό δ ε ς οί τ ώ ν
γενήσονται.
δέ μ ε ρ ι σ τ ώ ν
δήλον
μαθήσεως.
(2) ο ΰ π ω
(3) έ κ ε ί ν η ν
τήν
μεμαθήμορφήν
(4) τ ό όλον λ έ γ ε τ α ι ε χ ε ι ν τ ά μ έ ρ η . (6) τ ή δ' α ύ τ η η μ έ ρ α ή ξ ε ι π ά λ ι ν ό
βίου δ ι κ α ί ω ν .
(ίο)
της
σοφιστικήν.
(7)
(8) τ ά μ έ ρ η ού τ ό α υ τ ό τ ω ο λ ω .
σοφαί τών
GREEK
ούν
(5)
δαίμων
άλλ' αύται συνεβούλευσαν αύτοΐς
(g)
οτι τ ώ ν
αύται
δ' ο ΰ τ ε μ α θ ή σ ο ν τ α ι
μέν όλων
εστίν
αύτη ή
οΰτε έξις,
εκείνη.
ι . M a n y s t e m s show a n a l t e r n a t i o n b e t w e e n a l o n g v o w e l ( " s t r o n g g r a d e ' ' ) a n d t h e c o r r e s p o n d i n g s h o r t v o w e l ( " w e a k g r a d e " ) . T h i s is a n o t h e r k i n d of v o w e l .gradation; cf. 86. S o m e v b . s t e m s f o r m t h e pres. b y i n f i x i n g ν a n d s u f f i x i n g αν (478). T h e i n f i x e d ν b e c o m e s μ before a π - m u t e (368), γ b e f o r e a κ - m u t e (369).
AN
INTRODUCTION
73
162. (ii) H a s n ' t he y e t perceived these differences ? (12) Some of t h e m learned in this w a y and some in the following w a y . (13) Some of the animals h a v e feet a n d some [have] not. (14) T h e feet are p a r t s of the b o d y . (15) G o d (use article) is the saviour of men. (16) T i m e (use generic article) is a l w a y s divisible. (17) T h e veins h a d not y e t t a k e n their (use article: 45) form. (18) There we learned all d a y long (144.17). (19) Some h a v e this defect and some [have] t h a t . (20) W e wished to consult w i t h her again.
XXII. Active
PARTICIPLES
Participles;
εκών, άκων, πάς φι,λεΐ δέ τω κάμνοντι συσπεύδειν θεός. Αισχύλου απόσπασμα 395God helps them that help themselves.
163. A l l p a r t i c i p l e s f o l l o w t h e t h i r d declension in t h e m a s c u l i n e
and
the n e u t e r , t h e first declension in t h e feminine. I n present, f u t u r e ,
and
aorist t h e sign of t h e a c t i v e p a r t i c i p l e is ντ, w h i c h s t a n d s
between
t h e tense s t e m a n d the case ending.
Aorist:
παιδεύ-ω-ν
παιδεύ-ουσα (·-ο-ντ-ya)
παιδεΰ-ο-ν
παιδεύ-ο-ντ-ος
παιδευ-ούσης
παιδεύ-ο-ντ-ος
παιδεύ-ο-ντ-ι
παιδευ-ούση
παιδεύ-ο-ντ-ι
παιδεύ-ο-ντ-α παιδεύ-ω-ν
παιδεύ-ουσαν
παιδεΰ-ο-ν
παιδεύ-ουσα
παιδεϋ-ο-ν
παιδεύ-ο-ντ-ε
παιδευ-ούσα
παιδεύ-ο-ντ-ε
παιδευ-ό-ντ-οιν
παιδευ-ούσαιν
παιδευ-ό-ντ-οιν
παιδεύ-ο-ντ-ες
παιδεύ-ουσα!.
παιδεύ-ο-ντ-α
παιδευ-ό-ντ-ων
παιδευ-ουσών
παιδευ-ό-ντ-ων
παιδεύ-ουσι(ν)
παιδευ-ούσαις
παι,δεύ-ουσι.(ν}
παιδεύ-ο-ντ-ας
παιδευ-ούσάς
παιδεύ-ο-ντ-α
παιδεύ-σ-ω-ν
παιδεύ-σ-ουσα (-σ-ο-ντ-ya.)
παιδεϋ-σ-ο-ν, etc.
παιδεύ-σάς
παιδεύ-σασα ( -σα-ντ-ya)
παιδεϋ-σα-ν
παιδεύ-σα-ντ-ος
παιδευ-σάσης
παιδεύ-σα-ντ-ος
παιδεύ-σ α-ντ-ι
παι δευ-σάση
παιδεύ-σα-ντ-ι
παιδεύ-σα-ντ-α
παιδεύ-σάσαν
παιδευ-σα-ν
παιδεύ-σα-ς
παιδεύ-σάσα
παιδεΰ-σα-ν
παιδεύ-σα-ντ-ε
π αιδευ-σάσα
παιδεύ-σα-ντ-ε
παιδευ-σά-ντ-οιν
παιδευ-σάσαιν
παιδευ-σά-ντ-οιν
(-σα-ντ)
(-σα-ντ-ς)
74
AN
75
INTRODUCTION
παιδεύ-σα-ντ -ες
παιδεύ-σάσαι
παιδεύ-σα-ντ-α
παιδευ-σά-ντ -ων
παιδευ-σάσών
παιδευ-σά-ντ-ων
παιδεύ-σασι(ι
παιδευ-σάσαις
παιδεύ-σάσι(ν)
παιδεύ-σα-ντ -ας
παιδευ-σάσας
παιδεύ-σα-ντ-α
λιπ-ώ-ν
λιπ-ούσα
λιπ-ό-ν
(-ο-ντ-ya)
λιπ-ό-ντ-ος
λιπ-ούσης
λιπ-ό-ντ-ι
λιπ-ο ύσϊ]
λιπ-ό-ντ-ος λιπ-ό-ντ-ι
λιπ-ό-ντ-α
λιπ-οϋσαν
λιπ-ό-ν
λιπ-ώ-ν
λιπ-ούσα
λιπ-ό-ν
λιπ-ό-ντ-ε
λιπ-ούσα
λιπ-ό-ντ-ε
λιπ-ό-ντ-οιν
λιπ-ούσαιν
λιπ-ό-ντ-οιν λιπ-ό-ντ-α
λιπ-ό-ντ-ες
λιπ-οϋσαι
λιπ-ό-ντ-ων
λιπ-ουσών
λιπ-ό-ντ-ων
λιπ-οϋσι(ν)
λιπ-ούσαις
λιπ-ούσι(ν)
λιπ-ό-ντ-ας
λιπ-ούσας
λιπ-ό-ντ-α
Note that { ι ) E x c e p t in t h e v o c a t i v e singular, m a s c u l i n e s t e m s in αντ are i n f l e c t e d like
γέρων
(115)
and
i n f l e c t e d like γίγας
masculine
stems
in
σαντ or αντ ( i o 6 )
are
(115).
{2) F i n a l τ of n e u t e r s t e m s is d r o p p e d
(5).
{3) F e m i n i n e s are i n f l e c t e d like θάλαττα (55). (4) I n t h e second aorist t h e a c c e n t falls on t h e last s y l l a b l e of n o m i n a t i v e singular m a s c u l i n e or n e u t e r . 164. I n t h e p e r f e c t t h e sign of t h e a c t i v e p a r t i c i p l e is f o x in m a s c u l i n e a n d n e u t e r (but Foq in t h e n o m i n a t i v e singular), υσ in feminine. T h i s sign s t a n d s in t h e place of t h e α of t h e p e r f e c t a c t i v e tense sign (94) a n d b e f o r e t h e case ending. πε-παιδευ-κ-ώς
πε -πα ιδευ -κ -υΐα (-κ-υσ-ya)
πε-παιδευ-κ-ός (-κ-^ος)
(-κ-Ζως) πε-παιδευ-κ-ότ-ος
πε -πα ιδευ -κ -υ ί άς
πε -παιδεύ -κ-ότ-ος
πε-παιδευ-κ-ότ-ι
πε-παιδευ-κ-υίοϊ.
πε-παιδευ-κ-ότ-ι
πε-παιδευ-κ-ότ-α
πε -πα ιδευ -κ-υΐαν
πε-παιδευ-κ-ός
πε-παιδευ-κ-ώς
πε -πα ιδευ -κ -υΐα
πε-παιδευ -κ-ός
πε-παιδευ-κ-ότ-ε
πε-παιδευ-κ-υία
πε-πα ιδευ -κ-ότ-ε
πε-παιδευ-κ-ότ-οιν
πε -πα ιδευ -κ-υίαιν
πε-παιδευ-κ-ότ-οιν
72
PHILOSOPHICAL
GREEK
πε-παιδευ-κ-υΐαι
πε -παιδευ -κ -ότ -α
πε-παιδευ-κ-ότ-ων
πε-παιδευ-κ-υιών
πε-παιδευ-κ-ότ-ων
πε-πα',δευ-κ-όσι(ν)
πε-παιδευ-κ-υίαις
πε-παιδευ-κ-όσι (ν)
πε-παιδευ-κ-ότ-ας
πε-παιδευ-κ-υίας
πε -παιδευ -κ - ότ -α
πε-πραγ-ώς
πε-πραγ-υια
πε-πραγ-ός
πε-πράγ-ότ-ος
πε-πράγ-υίάς
πε-πραγ-ότ-ος
πε-πραγ-ότ-ι
π ε-π ρ αγ-υ ία
πε-πραγ-ότ-ι
πε-πράγ-ότ-α
πε-πράγ-υΐαν
πε-πραγ-ός
πε-πράγ-ώς
πε-πράγ-υΐα
πε-πράγ-ός
πε-πράγ-ότ-ε
πε-πράγ-υίά
πε-πράγ-ότ-ε
πε-πράγ-ότ-οιν
πε-πράγ-υίαιν
πε-πράγ-ότ-οιν
πε-πράγ-ότ-ες
πε-πραγ-υΐα».
πε-πράγ-ότ-α
πε-πράγ-ότ-ων
πε-π ράγ-υιών
πε-πραγ-ότ-ων
πε-πράγ-όσι(ν)
πε-πράγ-υίαις
πε-πράγ-όσι (ν)
πε-πράγ-ότ-ας
πε-πράγ-υίάς
πε-πραγ-ότ-α
πε-παιδευ-κ-ότ-ες
(-κ^οτ-σι)
(-υσ-ya)
N o t e t h a t t h e v o c a t i v e singular is l i k e the n o m i n a t i v e a n d t h a t
the
a c c e n t t e n d s t o s t a y on t h e sign. θνήσκω and 'ίστημι h a v e second p e r f e c t participles of a n o t h e r
type
τε-θνε-ώς, τε-θνε-ώσα, τε-θνε-ός; έστώς, έ-στώσα, έ-στός. 1 6 5 . T h e a d j e c t i v e s εκών willing a n d άκων unwilling,
w h i c h are u s e d like
present p a r t i c i p l e s (172), are i n f l e c t e d like λιπών a n d παιδεύων r e s p e c t ively
(163).
1 6 6 . πάς (παντ) every, all, is i n f l e c t e d as f o l l o w s : πάς
πασα
παν
παντός
πάσης
παντός
παντί
πάση
παντί
πάντα
πάσαν
πάντα
πάς
πάσα
πάν
πάντες
πάσαι
πάντα
πάντων
πασών
πάντων
πάσο (ν)
πάσαις
πάσι (ν)
πάντας
πάσας
πάντα
N o t e t h a t πάν is i r r e g u l a r l y long, a n d t h a t t h e a c c e n t of πάντων a n d πάσι is i r r e g u l a r l y recessive (113).
77
AN INTRODUCTION VOCABULARY
251.
'Αθηναίος, α, ον ['Αθήναι. A t h e n s ] , Athenian. αίσχύνω (αίσχυν: 477 b αίσχυνώ, ησχϋνα, ήσχύνθην, disgrace·, pass., be dishonored, be ashamed of doing (with ptc.) or to do (with inf.). α κ ο ύ ω (άκου for άκοΓ: 380), άκούσομαι, ήκουσα, άκήκοα (98.1 x ) , ήκούσθην [ a c o u s t i c s ] , hear (with gen. or acc. of thing; see also 172.3). άκων, άκουσα, 5κον [ά + εκών], unwilling. αμα (adv.), at the SAME time, Lat. SIMUL;
at
the SAME time
with
(with
dat.). άρχω, άρξω, ήρξ«, ήργμαι, ήρχθην [archangel], rule (with partit. gen.); act. and mid., be first (with ptc.), begin (with partit. gen., inf. [begin to do], or ptc. [begin b y doing]), δια-βάλλω, throw across, estrange (i.e., put apart), slander. δύο,
δυοΐν
[TWIN,
TWICE],
TWO,
Lat.
DUO (423; sometimes indecl.). €Ϊδος (εϊδεσ), ους, τό [είδον (όράω: 187), ιδέα, kaleidoscope], form, kind, i d e a , SPECIES, FORMA. έκών, έκοΰσα, έκόν, willing. ιδέα, ας, ή [ideology, ideogram], form, kind, i d e a , FORMA, SPECIES. λ α - ν - θ - ά ν - ω (ληθ, λαθ), λήσω, έλαθον, λέληθα [ A l a s t o r , L e t h e ] , escape the notice of (with acc.), lie hid (172.3); mid,, forget (with partit. gen.), μέσος, η, ον [Mesopotamia], MIDDLE, Lat. MEDIUS (in attrib. position); 168.
the MIDDLE of (in pred. position); μέσον, ου, τό, MIDDLE term of a syllogism. μεσάτης, ητος, ή [μέσος], mean. μεταξύ (adv.), between (with gen.), πας, πασα, παν [pantograph, p a n t s ] , every, all, whole, the whole of, with the art. in the same position as in English; τό διά πασών (sc. χορδών strings, notes), the octave, the d i a p a s o n , παύω, παύσω, έπαυσα, πέπαυκα, πέπαυμαι, έπαύθην [pause, FEW], stop (trans.); mid., stop (intrans.); with gen. of separation or with ptc. συνώνυμος, ον [σύν -+- 3νυμα=ονομα: 4*], having the same NAME, having the same NAME and the same nature and definition. τυ-γ-χ-άν-ω (τευχ, τυχ, τύχη: 47$), τεύξομαι, έτυχον, τετύχηκα [τύχη], happen (with ptc.); hit, obtain (with gen.). τυραννίς, ίδος, ή, t y r a n n y . τύραννος, ου, ό, ή, tyrant. τύχη, ης, ή, chance, T y c h e . Ολη, ης, ή [hylozoism], forest, timber, material, matter, MATERIES. φ θ ά ν ω (φθη, φθα: 47®)' φΟήσομαι, έφθασα or £φΟην (both aorists trans., b y exception; cf. 85), anticipate (with acc. or ptc. [172.3a] or both), χαίρω (χαρ, χαρη, χα-.ρη: 477). χαιρήσω, κεχάρηκα, κεχάρημαι, έχάρην (as act.) [χάρις], rejoice, enjoy (with dat. of cause or with ptc,).
(1) ουπω διαλελοίπασι τους ' Α θ η ν α ί ο υ ς
διαβάλλοντες
(172.3a-)-
ούκ ήσχϋνετο τους αύτοΰ ( a d v . ) τυράννους άπολιπών ( 1 7 2 . 3 a ) . φθήσεται τους άκούοντας λίθοις βάλλων (172.3&)· ό τύραννος.
(5)
(2)
(3) άμα δέ
(4) ταύτης της χ ώ ρ α ς ήρχεν
ού τ ύ χ η αγαθή έπαύθη ή έν τ ο ι ς πεδίοις τυραννίς άλλ' υ π '
ανδρών σοφών τε και δικαίων.
(6) εστί.ν ούν εκείνης τ η ς ϋλης εΐ'δη δύο.
(7) τ ό
αύτό είσιν ή ιδέα και τό είδος.
(8) έν τ ή νυκτί λανθάνει τά χ ρ ώ μ α τ α .
μεσότητές είσιν αί άρεταί.
μ ε τ α ξ ύ του άκρου και τ η ς κ ώ μ η ς πεδίον ή ν
(ίο)
(g)
μικρόν. 1 6 9 . (χι) T h e y w i l l n o t f o r g e t h e r l e t t e r . p e n e d to be exercising (172.3a),
(12) T h o s e h o r s e m e n
hap-
(13) A t t h e s a m e t i m e h i s f r i e n d o b -
7
PHILOSOPHICAL
8
tained the tyranny.
GREEK
(14) M a t e r i a l r e c e i v e s f o r m .
(15) Y o u s a y
t h e s e species of p l a n t s (pred. p o s i t i o n : 44) d i d n o t e s c a p e h i s n o t i c e . T h i s t r e e h a d t h e s a m e n a m e as t h a t (dat.). k i l l i n g w o m e n a n d c h i l d r e n (172.3a),
("somehow")
an
extreme.
(16)
(17) T h a t g i a n t e n j o y e d
(18) W e t o u c h e d i t b e f o r e t h e y
did ( " W e anticipated t h e m touching it"). l e a r n i n g a n d s o m e [did] n o t .
that
(19) S o m e of t h e m
enjoyed
(20) T h e m e a n (use n e u t . a d j . ) is i n a w a y
XXIII. Middle
and Passive
PARTICIPLES
Participles;
Uses of the
Participle
Ή ευδαιμονία ένέργειά τις εστίν. 'Αριστοτέλης έν ένάτω τών Νϊκομαχείων I I0gb29« Happiness is an activity. 1 7 0 . Middle a n d p a s s i v e participles are i d e n t i c a l in f o r m e x c e p t in aorist a n d f u t u r e . T h e aorist p a s s i v e p a r t i c i p l e , like t h e aorist p a s s i v e i n d i c a t i v e a n d i n f i n i t i v e (147, 148), h a s a c t i v e f o r m ; it is m a d e u p of v e r b s t e m , tense sign (θε in first aorist p a s s i v e , ε in second aorist passive), p a r t i c i p i a l sign ντ, and case ending. πκιδευ-θείς
(-θε-ντ-ς)
παιδευ-θεΐσα (-θε-ντ-ya) παιδευ-θέ-ν (-θε-ντ)
παιδευ~θέ-ντ-ος
παιδευ-θείσης
παιδεύ -θέ-ντ-ος
παιδευ-Οέ-ντ-ι
παιδευ-θείση
παιδεύ-6έ-ντ-1
παιδευ-θέ-ντ-α
παιδευ-θεισαν
παιδευ-θέ-ν
παιδεύ-θείς
παιδευ-θεΐσα
παιδευ-θέ-ν
παιδευ-θέ-ντ-ε
παιδευ-Οείσά
παιδευ-θέ-ντ-ε
παιδευ-θέ-ντ-οιν
παιδευ-θείσαιν
παιδευ-θέ-ντ-οιν
παιδευ-θέ-ντ-ες
παιδευ-θεΐσαι
παιδευ-θέ-ντ-α
παιδευ-Θέ-ντ-ων
παιδευ-θεισών
παιδεύ -θέ -ντ-ων
πκιδευ-θεΐσι(ν)
παιδευ-θείσαις
παιδευ-θεΐσι (ν)
παιδευ-θέ-ντ-ας
παιδευ-Οείσάς
παιδευ-θέ-ντ-α
έκ-πλαγ-είς
(-θε-ντ-σι)
(-ε-ντ-ς)
έκ-πλαγ-εΐσα (-ε-ντ-ya)
έκ-πλαγ-έ-ν
έκ-πλαγ-έ-ντ-ος
(-ε-ντ)
έκ-πλαγ-είσης
έκ-πλαγ-έ-ντ-ος
έκ-πλαγ-έ-ντ-ι
έκ-πλαγ-είση
έκ-πλαγ-έ-ντ-ι
έκ-πλαγ-έ-ντ-α
έκ-πλαγ-εΐσαν
έκ-πλαγ-έ-ν
έκ-πλαγ-είς
έκ-πλαγ-εΐσα
έκ-πλαγ-έ-ν
έκ-πλαγ-έ-ντ-ε
έκ-πλαγ-είσα
έκ -πλαγ-έ-ντ-ε
έκ-πλαγ-έ-ντ-οιν
έκ-πλαγ-είσα ι ν
έκ-πλαγ-έ-ντ-οιν
έκ-πλαγ-έ-ντ-ες
έκ-πλαγ-εΐσαι
έκ-πλαγ-έ-ντ-α
έκ-πλαγ-έ-ντ-ων
έκ-πλαγ-εισών
έκ-πλαγ-έ-ντ-ων
έκ-πλαγ-εϊσι(ν)
έκ-πλαγ-είσαις
έκ-πλαγ-εΐσι(ν)
έκ-πλαγ-είσάς
έκ-πλαγ-έ-ντ-α
(-ε-ντ-σι) έκ-πλαγ-έ-ντ-ας
79
72
PHILOSOPHICAL
GREEK
1 7 1 . T h e p a s s i v e participles in tenses other t h a n the aorist, a n d m i d d l e participles, are m a d e u p of tense stem, p a r t i c i p i a l sign
all
μενο,
a n d case ending. I n t h e p e r f e c t t h e y are declined like φίλος (401); in all o t h e r tenses t h e y are p r o p a r o x y t o n e (10, 65) w h e r e t h e q u a n t i t y of the ultima
permits.
Present middle and passive: παιδευ- ο-μενος παιδευ- ο-μένου παιδευ- ο-μένω παιδευ- ό-μενο ν
παιδευ- ο-μενη παιδευ- ο-μένης παιδευ- ο-μένη
παιδευ-ό- μενον παιδευ-ο- μένου παιδευ-ο- μένω παιδευ-ό- μενον
παιδευ- ο-μενε
παιδευ- ο-μένην παιδευ- ο-μένη
παιδευ-ό- μενον
παιδευ- ο-μένω
παιδευ- ο-μένα
παιδευ-ο- μένω
παιδευ- •ο-μένοιν
παιδευ- •ο-μένα ιν
παιδευ-ο- μένοιν
παιδευ- •ό-μενοι
παιδευ- ό-μεναι
παιδευ-ό· μεν α
παιδευ- ο-μένων
παιδευ- -ο-μένων
παιδευ-ο- •μένων
παιδευ- -ο-μένοις
παιδευ· -ο-μέναις
παιδευ-ο· •μένοις
παιδευ- Ό-μένους
παιδευ- ο-μένάς
παιδευ-ο -•μενα
παιδευ-σ-ο-μένη
παιδευ-σ-ό-μενον
παιδευ-θη-σ-ο-μένη
παιδευ-θη-σ-ό-μενον
παιδευ-σα-μένη
παιδευ -σά - μενον
Future middle: παιδευ-σ-ό-μένος Future
passive:
παιδευ-Οη-σ-ό-μενος Aorist middle: παιδευ-σά-μενος
Perfect middle and passive: πε-παιδευ-μένος
πε-παιδευ-μένη
πε-παιδευ-μένον
Future perfect middle and passive: πε-παιδευ-σ-ό-μενος
πε-παιδευ-σ-ο-μένη
πε-παιδευ-σ-ό-μενον
172. T h e p a r t i c i p l e is a v e r b a l a d j e c t i v e w h i c h a l w a y s agrees in g e n d e r , n u m b e r , a n d case wdth its s u b j e c t . T h e present p a r t i c i p l e i n d i c a t e s t i m e c o n t e m p o r a r y w i t h t h a t of t h e m a i n v e r b , t h e f u t u r e p a r t i c i p l e t i m e s u b s e q u e n t to t h a t of t h e m a i n v e r b , a n d the aorist p a r t i c i p l e (ordinarily) t i m e prior t o t h a t of the m a i n v e r b . T h e p a r t i c i p l e is used in three w i d e l y different w a y s :
AN
81
INTRODUCTION
(1) A t t r i b u t i v e (often the equivalent of a restrictive relative clause), as adjective or as n o u n : ο τρέχων παις the running boy; οί τρέχοντες those who are running; πολεμούντων πόλις a city of belligerents; ό ού βασιλεύων the man who is not king (definite); ο μή βασιλεύων one who is not king {indefinite). (2) Circumstantial, standing in predicate position and
expressing
(a) T i m e : ταΰτα έπραξε βασιλεύων he did this while he was
king;
ταύτα έπραξε βασιλεύσας he did this when he became king. (b) Cause: ταΰτα πράττουσι πιστεύοντες αύτώ they do this because trust him;
ταΰτα πράττει προσαγορευθεΐς υπ' αυτής he does
they this
because she spoke to him. T h e causal participle m a y be labeled as causal b y άτε, οιον, or ώς: άτε τύραννος ών ουκ ήσχϋνετο like the tyrant that he was, he felt no shame. (With ώς there is no implication t h a t the cause assigned is one in w h i c h the speaker believes.) (c) Concession: ΐατρεύομεν αύτόν πολέμιον οντά we are tending him in spite of his being an enemy.
T h e concessive participle m a y be
labeled as concessive b y the particle καίπερ: καίπερ στρατηγός ών έκλεπτεν though he was a general, he used to steal. (d) Means or Manner: ζήσομεν κλέπτοντες we shall live by
stealing
or we shall live a life of stealing. (e) Purpose
(future participle), c h i e f l y after verbs meaning come,
go, send, and the like: έπεμψαν αύτόν τήν γραΰν πείσοντα they sent him to persuade the old woman. (f) Condition: ταΰτα πείσει βασιλεύων this is what will happen you if you are (g) A n y
Attendant
to
king. Circumstance
(the logical
connection
being
sometimes ill-defined): πέμψάς έκέλευσεν he sent and ordered. If the subject of a circumstantial participle has no o t h e r construction in the sentence, it is put in the genitive, w i t h the participle agreeing. This is called the Genitive A b s o l u t e (cf. the L a t i n A b l a t i v e Absolute), εκών j/
and άκων m a y be used in the same w a y : ταύτα έ'πραξας έκείνου βασιλεύοντος you did this when (or because or although) he was king; ταΰτα έ'πράξε της γυναικός ακούσης he did this against his wife's (3) Supplementary,
completing
the idea
will. of the verb,
and agreeing
either w i t h the subject or w i t h the object of the v e r b : (a) N o t in Indirect Discourse: ήρχε κιθαρίζων he was the first to play the cithara; τούτο ούκ αισχϋνομαι λέγων I say this without
shame;
παύω αύτήν ύφαίνουσαν I stop her weaving; παύομαι ύφαίνων I
stop
11); ir i to ( it, su suffic
AN
« α ί π ε ρ (particle s o m e t i m e s l a b e l i n g conc e s s i v e ptc.), although. κελ€υω. κελεύσω, έκέλευσα, κεκέλευκα, κεκέλευσμαι, έκελεύσθην [ p r o c e l e u s m a t i c ] , order, command, urge (wi th acc. of pers. a n d inf.). τ έ μ ν ω (τεμ, ταμ, τ μ η : 47®) > τεμώ (105), έταμον,
τέτμηκα,
τέτμημαι,
83
INTRODUCTION
έτμήθην
[atom, anatomy, entomology, tome], cut.
τράπεζα, ης, ή [trapeze, trapezoid], table. τ ρ έ χ ω (τρεχ, δραμ, δραμη), δραμοΰμαι (105), εδραμον, δεδράμηκα, δεδράμημαι
[trochee, hippodrome], run. ώ ν , ούσα, [ o n t o l o g y ] , being (pres. p t c . of ειμί be: 47ο).
175.
(ί) ήγγείλατε τήν αΐσθησιν μεσότητα ουσαν.
του1
αίσθάνεσθαι • 6 γάρ
αίσθανό μένος
κρίνει
πως.
έχοντες ιππέας, Ικανοί ήσαν τον πόλεμον παΰσαι. φύλακα τον τά παιδία σώσαντα.
(3) καίπερ
ούκέτι
(4) έδράμομεν παρά τον
(5) οί δέ φιλόσοφοι, άτε ούκ έκπλαγέντες,
-εμενον.
(6) έν τοις αίσθητοΐς τά μικρά λανθάνει,
τον
άρχοντος πόδα.
του
(2) τ ο 1 κρΐνειν γένος
( j ) τέμνων ΐάτρευεν ό ιατρός
(8) οί αισθητήρια έχοντες αισθάνονται.
τράπεζα αισθητή μέν, αισθητική δ' ού.
(g) ή
(ίο) α'ίσθησιν έχει πάντα τά ζώα.
1 7 6 . ( ι ι ) Those w h o run will receive presents before the others do (cf. 169.18).
{12) A l t h o u g h his foot w a s being cut (use gen.), the y o u n g
man did not perceive [it]. enough to guard the palace. organ hear.
(13) H e was reported to h a v e
horsemen
(14) T h e animals that h a v e this sense
(15) D i d y o u report t h a t all the soldiers h a d run ?
Those w h o slander are themselves slandered.
(17) W e perceive
form b u t not the m a t t e r ; the m a t t e r a l w a y s escapes men's notice. Some of the parts are sensitive and some [are] not. was competent, he wished to rule.
(16) the (18)
(19) I n a s m u c h as he
(20) A l t h o u g h he had not
been
ordered to take the table, he took it ( " A l t h o u g h he had not been ordered, he took
the
table").
i . T h e i n f i n i t i v e , as a v e r b a l noun, s o m e t i m e s t a k e s t h e n e u t e r article (305.2).
XXIV. PRONOUNS Relative, Interrogative,
and Indefinite Pronouns]
Enclitics;
Indicative
of ειμί
Δός μοι ποϋ στώ, καί κινώ τήν γήν. 'Αρχιμήδης. Give me a place to stand, and I will move the earth,
1 7 7 , T h e simple relative pronoun 6 ς who is inflected (except for accent) like εκείνος (158). η
r' Ο
ού
ής
ού
Φ * ον
fl Γ' ήν
Φ 6
ος
ώ r
οιν
ώ οϊν
r/
ω οϊν
οί ών
αϊ ών
α ών
οίς ους
οάς
οίς
«ς
ά
1 7 8 , T h e direct interrogative pronoun τις who and the indefinite pronoun τις some are inflected alike except for accent, τις a l w a y s h a v i n g an acute (which never turns to grave), and τις being an enclitic (16) except in the alternative form άττα. Indefinite
Interrogative
Masculine and Feminine
Neuter
Masculine and Feminine
Neuter
τις τίνος, του
τί τίνος, του
τίνι, τω τίνα
τίνι, τω
τινός, του τινί, τω
τί
τινά
τι
τίνε τίνοιν
τίνε τίνοιν
τινέ τινοιν
τινέ τινοιν
τίνες τίνων
τίνα τίνων
τινές
τινά, άττα
τίσι(ν)
τίσι(ν) τίνα
τινών τισί (ν)
τινών τισί(ν)
τινάς
τινά, άττα
τίνας
τις
τι τινός, του τινί, τω
179. T h e rules for accenting an enclitic and the preceding word are as follows:
AN
INTRODUCTION
85
(1) If the preceding w o r d is oxytone, it does not change its accent to a grave (13); if it is perispomenon (io), it stands u n c h a n g e d ; in either case the enclitic loses its a c c e n t : οδός τις; οδοί τίνες; όδών τε; οδών τίνων. (2) If the preceding word is paroxytone, it stands unchanged and a monosyllabic enclitic loses its accent: τόπος τις; -τόποι τινές; τόπων τινών; τόποις τισί. (3) If the preceding word is p r o p a r o x y t o n e or properispomenon, it takes as a second accent an acute on the ultima, and the enclitic loses its a c c c n t : θάλαττά τις; θάλατταί τίνες; δώρον τι; δώρά τίνα. (4) A n enclitic followed b y an enclitic retains its accent if dissyllabic, receives an acute if monosyllabic: ποτέ τις; ποτέ τίνες; ει τις τινα. (5) A n emphatic enclitic retains its a c c e n t : τινές μεν . . . τινές δέ; τό χρώμα έν σώματι • ούκοϋν και έν τινί σώματι; ό τις άνθρωπος the individual man {whoever he m a y be). (6) A proclitic followed b y an enclitic receives an a c u t e : ε'ί τις. 1 8 0 . Indefinite relatives, whether pronominal or a d j e c t i v a l , are identical in form w i t h indirect interrogatives. T h e simple indefinite relative pronoun (or indirect interrogative) is όστις whoever, ivhatever, who, what, which is made u p of ός and the indefinite τις. όστις ούτινος, δτου
ήτις
ο τι
ήστινος
ούτινος, ότου
φτινι, οτω οντινα
ήτινι
φτινι, δτω
ήντινα
δ τι
ώτινε οίντινοιν
ώτινε
ώτινε
οίντινοιν
οίντινοιν
οιτινες
αίτινες
άτινα, άττα
ώντινων, δτων
ώντινων
ώντινων, οτων
οιστισι(ν), δτοις
αίστισι(ν)
οιστισι(ν), δτοΐί
ουστινας
αστινας
άτινα, άττα
If
181. The indicative of ειμί be is inflected as follows (enclitics m a r k e d b y asterisks): Middle Active Present Future Imperfect (εσ-μι) (έσ-σί, έ-σί)
έσ-τί(ν)* ι.
ή, ή-ν
εΐ-μί* εί
S o m e t i m e s εστι(ν): see
1
1181.
ήσ-θα
(ε-σ-ε-σαι)
ή-ν
(ε-σ-ε-ται)
έ-σ-ο-μαι £-σ-Υ), έ-σ-ει ε-σ-ται
72
PHILOSOPHICAL
GREEK Middle Future
Active Imperfect
Present
ήσ-τον
ε-σ-ε-σθον
έσ-τόν*
ήσ-την
έ-σ-ε-σθον
έσ-μέν*
ή-μεν
έ-σ-ό-μεθα
εσ-τε
ή-τε,
έσ-τόν*
·
182.
άμφοϊν),
BOTH, L a t .
AMBO.
α ν α γ κ α ί ο ς , ct, ov [ανάγκη], forcible, forced, necessary, related by blood. β α ί ν ω (βη, βα, βαν: 47^). βήσομαι, έβην (463), βέβηκα, βέβαμαι, έβάθην [ b a diabetes,
COME, L a t . VENIO],
go.
ειμί (έσ), εσομαι [AM, IS], be, L a t . SUM; pres. inf. είναι (έσ-ναι). κατα-βαίνω, go down. κατ-άγω, lead or bring down, lead back. ϋρος, ους, τό [ o r e a d ] , mountain. Βρος, ου, ό, boundary, limit, term of a 183.
ε-σ-ε-σθε έ'-σ-ο-νται
VOCABULARY
άγω, όέξω, ήγαγον (98.3), ήχα, ήγμαι, ήχΟην [ p e d a g o g u e , ACTION], drive, lead, L a t . AGO. άμφ{ [αμφω, a m p h i t h e a t r e , AMBId e x t r o u s ] (prep.), concerning (with g e n . ) ; about (of p l a c e or t i m e , w i t h a c c . ) ; οί άμφΐ τον στρατηγόν, the general and those about him. αμφότεροι, αι, α, BOTH; άμφοτέρως (adv.), in either case, in BOTH ways. α μ φ ω (nom. a n d a c c . ; gen. a n d d a t .
sis,
ήσ-τε
ή-σαν
είσί(ν)
(έσ-ντί)
(l)
αμφότεροι
κατήγοντο.
p r o p o s i t i o n , premise, definition, TERMINUS. ο ρ ί ζ ω (477), όριώ (48.4), ώρισα, ώρικα, ώρισμαι, ώρίσθην [6ρος, h o r i z o n ] , a c t . and m i d . , bound, divide, determine, define, DEFINIO. 8ς, ή, o (rel. p r o n . ) , who, which, what. δσπερ, ήπερ, οπερ ( e m p h a t i c rel. p r o n . ) , the very one who, the very thing which. δστις, ήτις, δ τι (indef. rel. a n d indir. interrog. pronom. adj.), whoever f whatever, who, what. όστισοΰν, ή-ισοϋν, ότιοΰν (generalizing indef. p r o n . ) , anybody whatsoever, anything whatsoever. ούκοΰν (inferential p a r t i c l e ) , so, thenr therefore. οΰκουν (inferential p a r t i c l e ) , 50 . . . not, then . . . not, therefore . . . not. τ ί ς , τί (interrog, p r o n . and a d j . ) , WHO, WHAT, L a t . QUis; τί (acc. sing. n e u t . as a d v . ) , why. τΙς, τί (indef. pron. a n d a d j . , encl.),. somebody, something, some, any, a certain,
Lat.
QUIS.
δέ, οί τ ε ά ρ χ ο ν τ ε ς και. οί α ρ χ ό μ ε ν ο ι ,
κατ'
ορούς
τινός
(2) τ ο ι ς ο ρ ν ΐ σ ι ο ύ χ οί α ύ τ ο ί είσι ν ό μ ο ι ο ί π ε ρ τ ο ι ς ά λ λ ο ι ς ζ ώ ο ι ς .
(3) π ε ρ ί μέν ούν χ ώ ρ α ς κ α ι ο ρ ώ ν κ α ι π ό λ ε ω ν κ α ι θ α λ ά τ τ η ς ο ύ τ ω ς
ώρισται.
(4) ά τ ε δέ σ ΐ τ ο ν ο υ κ έ χ ο ν τ ε ς κ α τ ή γ α γ ο ν τ ά π λ ο ΐ α έ κ τ α ύ τ η ς τ η ς θ α λ ά τ τ η ς . (5)
άμφοτέρως
έσται
άμφί τον βασιλέα,
(j)
ταύτό ή
( = τό
αύτό).
μορφή και τ ό είδος π ά ν τ ω ν
τ ι ς τ ώ ν ν ε α ν ι ώ ν τ ο ύ τ ο ν τον όρον ε λ ε ξ ε ν ; μετεπέμψω.
(ίο)
(ό) ο ύ κ ο ΰ ν
καταβήσονται
έν τ ο ι ς
(9) ο ΰ κ ο υ ν κ α τ η κ τ α ι
α μ φ ω δέ υ π ό τ ώ ν τ ο υ ς φ ύ λ α κ α ς λ α θ ό ν τ ω ν
οροις.
οί (8)
ό δ ο ύ λ ο ς δν
κατήχθησαν—
δπερ έκεκελεύκεσαν τ ώ ν άρχόντων τινές. k even
(11)
They
anything
will not
say
whatsoever").
anything (12)
at
all
Hasn't
("They he
yet
will n o t learned
say
not
who
the
AN
INTRODUCTION
87
people are w h o are coming down ? (13} It is impossible t o plan a b o u t (περί) things t h a t are of (έξ) necessity. (14) This learning is necessary and is w o r t h y of wise men. (15) Those w h o do not perceive (172.1) do not learn. (16) W e r e we b o t h in the c i t y at that time ? (17) W e r e y o u both a friend and a relative of the w o m a n (dat.) ? (18) N o t all children e n j o y learning. (19) H o w did she define wisdom ? (20) D o e s he s a y that some red-blooded animals h a v e no ( " h a v e n o t " ) v e i n s ?
XXXII. Ω-VERBS indicative,
Infinitives,
and Participles
of Verbs
in άω
Ού γάρ δοκειν άριστος αλλ' είναι θέλει. Αισχύλου έν τοις Ε π τ ά επί Θήβας 592-
For he wishes not to seem great but to be great.
3 8 5 . V e r b s in άω a n d όω, a n d v e r b s in έω h a v i n g more t h a n t w o syllables, a r e c o n t r a c t e d in t h e present s y s t e m (Table I I , p. 1 4 ) ; in all other s y s t e m s t h e v o w e l s α, ε, a n d 0 are g e n e r a l l y l e n g t h e n e d , α t o η (to ά a f t e r ε, ι, or ρ), ε t o η, a n d 0 t o ω. L e a r n t h e present a n d i m p e r f e c t i n d i c a t i v e , a n d t h e present i n f i n i t i v e s a n d participles, a c t i v e , middle, a n d
passive,
of τ ι μ ά ω (452-453, 412). N o t e t h a t (1) α 4- an o - s o t m d
(ο, ου, ω) = ω.
(o-sounds p r e v a i l o v e r all o t h e r
sounds.) (2) α + a n
e - s o u n d = an a - s o u n d : α + ε — ά, α -j- ει = α.
( W h e n an
a - s o u n d c o n t r a c t s w i t h an e - s o u n d , t h e one t h a t c o m e s first prevails.) B u t ζάω is i n f l e c t e d ζω, ζής, ζή, etc., a n d χράομαι is i n f l e c t e d χρωμαι, ZPY)> χρήται, etc. (3) 1 is n e v e r l o s t : α -f- ει = «. (The present i n f i n i t i v e a c t i v e is o n l y an a p p a r e n t e x c e p t i o n : τϊμάν is f r o m τΐμα-ε-εν [36].) (4) A c c e n t is not a f f e c t e d b y c o n t r a c t i o n : έτϊμάέτον — έτϊμάτον; ετΐμάέτήν = έτΐμάτην. Most
two-syllable
v e r b s in έω are c o n t r a c t e d o n l y w h e n t h e ε is
f o l l o w e d b y ε or ει: πλέω, πλεΐς, πλεϊ, πλεϊτον, πλεΐτον,
πλέομεν, πλεϊτε,
πλέουσι; so θέω; δέομαι h a s s e c o n d singular δέει. 1 8 6 . W h e n a r e l a t i v e w o u l d n a t u r a l l y b e t h e direct o b j e c t of a v e r b , i t is g e n e r a l l y a t t r a c t e d t o t h e case of its a n t e c e d e n t if t h e a n t e c e d e n t is a g e n i t i v e or a d a t i v e : έκ των πόλεων ών έτύγχανεν έχων from the cities which he happened which
he happened
to hold', έν ταΐς πόλεσιν at ς έτύγχανεν έχων in the cities to hold. T h i s a t t r a c t i o n m a y occur e v e n w h e n t h e
a n t e c e d e n t is not e x p r e s s e d : έκ των παρόντων και ών όράτε from that which is present and which you see; σύν οις όράτε with those whom you see. 88
AN
89
INTRODUCTION VOCABULARY
251.
άπατάω, άπατήσω, ήπάτησα, ήπάτηκα, ήπάτημαι, ήπατήΟην, deceive. γένεσις, εως, ή, origin, coming into being, GENERATION, GENERATIO. γ ε ν ν ά ω , γεννήσω, έγέννησα, γεγέννηκα, γεγέννημοα, έγεννήΟην (causative of γίγνομαι), beget, bear, produce. γίγνομαι (γεν, γον, γν, γενη, γενε: 98.2), γενήσομαι, έγενόμην, γέγονα, γενένημαι [γένος], come into being, become, turn out to be, prove to be; γενητός, ή, όν (verbal a d j . ) , originated,, originable; xb γενόμενον, the past. 4 ά ω (έ-Fa), έάσω, είασα, ε'ίακα, εί'κμαι, είάθην, permit (with a c c . a n d inf.), let go, let alone (with acc.). έ ρ ω τ ά ω , έ ρωτήσω, ή ρώτησα, ήρώτηκα, ήρώτημαι, ήρωτήθην, ask a q u e s t i o n , ask a person a q u e s t i o n (double a c c . ) , question a p e r s o n ; w i t h εϊ whether; w i t h πότερον . . . ή whether . . . or. ζ ά ω (185.2), ζήσω [ζωή], live. νικάω, νικήσω, ένϊκησα, νενϊκηκα, νενΐκημαι, ένΐκήθην, conquer. ό ρ ά ω (5ορα, όπ, f i S ) , i m p f . έώρων (έώραον: 69), οψομαι, εΐδον (έ^ιδον), 188.
(l)
ομως
δ' ή π α τ ή θ η μ ε ν
ύπό
εορακα or εωρακα, εωραμαι or ωμμαι, ώφθην [ p a n o r a m a , o p t i c , i d e a ] , see, L a t . VIDEO (when literal, w i t h p t c . in indir. disc.; w h e n f i g u r a t i v e , w i t h p t c . in indir. disc, or wnth cm; ορατός, ή, όν (verbal a d j . ) , visible, VISIBILIS. οφθαλμός, ου, ό [οψομαι, o p h t h a l mic], eye. δψις, εως, ή [οψομαι, t h a n a t o p s i s ] , aspect, sight, vision, VIS US. πειραστικός, ή, όν, tentative, critical. πειράω, πειρασω, έπείρασα, πεπείρακα, πεπείραμαι, έπειράΟην [πείρα, p i r a t e ] (act., mid. d e p o n e n t , a n d pass, d e p o n e n t ) , try, test ( w i t h inf. or w i t h gen. of p e r s o n ) ; πειοατέον (verbal a d j . ) , one must try. πλήν (adv.), except·, as prep., except (with g e n . ) ; as c o n j . , except that. σ π ά ω (σπα), σπάσω, έσπασα, έσπαχα, έσπασμαι, έσπάσθην[8ρα8Πΐ], draw, pull. τιμάω, τ ι μ ή σ ω , έτίμησα, τετΐμηκα, τετίμημαι, έτϊμήΟην [τιμή], honor, set a price on, assess. τιμή, ής, ή [timocracy], honor, worth, price. των
άεί
έάσουσιν αύτόν οΰτ' έ ρ ω τ ή σ α ι ούτε λέξαι
ψευδόμενων.
{198) ·
(2) ά λ λ '
(3) τ ω ν τ ό τ ε
ούκ
νικησάντων
οί μεν νΰν ν ϊ κ ώ ν τ α ι , οί δ' ού.
(4) έ ω ρ ώ μ ε ν π ά ν τ α ς π λ ή ν τ ω ν λ α θ ό ν τ ω ν ν ϊ κ ω -
μένους.
τό
(5)
ού
ταύτόν
( =
αύτό)
χρώμα
και
όράτόν.
(6)
δήλον
δέ
τούτο και κ α τ ά τόν λ ό γ ο ν · τ ό γάρ ζ ω ο ν όριζόμεθα τ ώ έχειν αΐσθησιν, π ρ ώ τ ο ν δέ
τήν
πρώτην,
διαλέλειπται
αύτη
μικρά
γένεσίς
έστιν.
πεΐραν
είλήφαμεν.
189.
(ιι)
όψει
αφή. χωρά,
(j)
κατά
δι'
δ' ή σ α ν
ής
μέσους
όρώμεν.
ο'ιδε
δέ
τούς
(15)
o u t of t h e e a r t h ?
οί λ ό γ ο ι .
produce At
other
any
rate
creatures. I
didn't
(13)
Not
(14) ask
my
οφθαλμούς
(8) π ά σ ι τ ο ι ς (ίο)
W e s h a l l t r y t o h o n o r t h o s e w o r t h y of h o n o r .
being
plant.
τή
(9) π ε ι ρ α σ τ ι κ ο ί
see w a t e r d r a w n into
δ5 ε σ τ ί ν
τών
(12)
ζωοις
γενητών
Did
all c r e a t u r e s t h a t
He
still
father
lives that
you come
[the] life of a (make
"that"
emphatic b y placing at beginning).
(16)
H a v e y o u seen the m a n
who
deceived
her
asking
(18)
them ?
(17)
We
all h e a r d
H e has urged t h e m to live and to conquer. not.
him
something.
(19) T h e y h a v e e y e s b u t s e e
(20) T h i s i s n o t c h a r a c t e r i s t i c o f ( p r e d . g e n . of p o s s e s s i o n )
w h o h o n o r m o n e y f o r i t s o w n s a k e ( " o n a c c o u n t of i t s e l f " ) .
those
XXVI. Ω-VERBS Indicative,
Infinitives,
and Participles
of Verbs in έω and όω
"Ετερος γάρ αύτ&ς δ φίλος εστίν. 'Αριστοτέλης έν τ φ ένάτω Νϊκομαχείων l i 7 o b 6 - 7 · A friend is another self.
τών
1 9 0 . L e a r n t h e p r e s e n t a n d i m p e r f e c t i n d i c a t i v e a n d t h e p r e s e n t inf i n i t i v e s a n d participles, a c t i v e , middle, a n d p a s s i v e , of φιλέω (454-455, 412) a n d δηλόω (456-457). N o t e t h a t ( 1) ε before a l o n g v o w e l (ω) or b e f o r e a d i p h t h o n g is a b s o r b e d . ( 2) ε + ε = ει. ( 3) ε -[- ο = ομ. (ο-sounds p r e v a i l o v e r all other sounds.) ( 4) 0 before a l o n g v o w e l (ω) or b e f o r e ου is a b s o r b e d . ( 5) ο + ει =
οι. (o-sounds p r e v a i l o v e r all o t h e r sounds.)
( 6) 0 + ε = ου. (o-sounds p r e v a i l o v e r all o t h e r sounds.) ( 7) 0 + 0 = ου. ( 8) ι is n e v e r l o s t : ε + ει — ει; ο + ει = οι. (The p r e s e n t
infinitive
a c t i v e is o n l y an a p p a r e n t e x c e p t i o n : δηλοΰν is f r o m δηλό-ε-εν [36].) ( 9) A c c e n t εφίλέέτήν
is
not
affected
by
contraction:
— έφιλείτην; εδήλόέτόν
έφίλέέτόν = έφιλεΐτον;
= έδηλοΰτον; έδήλόέτήν
- έδη-
λούτην. ( ί ο ) T h e present participles of δηλόω are i n f l e c t e d e x a c t l y like t h o s e of φιλέω. 191.
VOCABULARY
άδικέω, αδικήσω, ήδίκησα, ήδίκηκα, ήδίκημαι, ήδικήθην, be unjust (άδικος), do wrong, injure (abs. or w i t h o b j . acc.). άδικία, ας, ή, injustice, wrongdoing. άδικος, ον [ά + δίκη: 4Χ1> unjust, wicked. α Ιτέα), αιτήσω, $τησα, ητηκα, ήτημαι, ήτήθην, ask a f a v o r , ask s o m e b o d y f o r s o m e t h i n g (two o b j . a c c u s a t i v e s ) . δβΐ (δε/, δε/η), δεήσει, εδέησε (impers.), it is necessary (with inf. or w i t h acc. a n d inf.), there is need of (with g e n . ) ;
as pass, d e p o n e n t , δέομαι (2d sing, n o t δει b u t δέει: 185), δεήσομαι, Seδέημαι, έδεήΟην, need, want, ask a t h i n g of a person (with gen, or acc. of t h i n g , gen. of pers.). δηλόω, δηλώσω, έδήλωσα, δεδήλωκα, δεδήλωμαι, έδηλώθην, make evident (δήλος), show. δοκέω, (δοκ, δοκε), δόξω, £δοξα, δέδογμαι (45°). εδόχθην [δόξα], think (with inf. in indir. disc.), be thought, seem, seem best.
AN
102
INTRODUCTION
οϊκαδε ( a d v . ) , homeward, home. οικείος, α, ov, domestic, related, one's own (as c o n t r a s t e d w i t h αλλότριος), suitable. οίκέω, οικήσω, οίκησα, ωκηκα, ωκημαι, ώκήθην [οίκος, d i o c e s e ] , inhabit (with o b j . acc.), dwell (with έν a n d d a t . ) . οίκοδομέω, οικοδομήσω, ώκοδόμησα, ώκοδόμ.ηκα, φκοδόμημαι, φκοδομήθην [οικοδόμος], build. οικοδόμος, ου, ο [οίκος δέμω], builder. οϊκοθεν (adv.), from home. οΐκοι ( a d v . : 14), at home. "ποιέω, ποιήσω, έποίησα, πεττοίηκα, πεποίημαι, έποιήθην [ποιητής], make, do;
ποίητέος, α, ov (verbal a d j . ) , to be made, to be done; κακώς ποιώ, treat badly. ποίησις, εως, ή, making, poetry, ποιητικός, ή, όν, productive, poetical; ποιητική (sc. τέχνη), art of p o e t r y , φιλέω, φιλήσω, έφίλησα, πεφίληκα, πεφίλημαι, εφιλήθην [φίλος], love, kiss, be accustomed. φοβέω, φοβήοω, έφόβησα, πεφόβημαι, έφοβήθην [φόβος], frighten; pass, d e - " p o n e n t , fear (with o b j . a c c . or w i t h o b j . c l a u s e i n t r o d u c e d b y μή or μ,ή ού: 228.2, 239.2).
1 9 2 . ( l ) τους δώρα αίτοΰντας ήδίκουν οί τούτο τό άστυ
οίκοϋντες.
(2)
τοις οίκείοις όνόμασι δει τήν άλήθειαν δηλοΰν. (3) ά δει μαθόντας ποιεΐν, ταΰτα ποιαΰντες μ,ανΟάνομεν. (4} οίκοδομοϋντες οικοδόμοι γίγνονται και κιθαρίζοντες κιθαρισταί · ούτω δέ και τά δίκαια πράττοντες δίκαιοι γιγνόμεθα. (5) φανερόν ούν δτι έστι τις αδικία παρά τήν όλην έν μέρει, συνώνυμος. (6) -ούκοΰν κατά τούτον τον λόγον δίκαιος έσται ό τά δίκαια μεμαθηκώς, άδικος •δε ό τά άδικα. (7) οικοδόμους δέ τινας οίκοθεν μετεπεμψάμεθα οικίας τοις ήγεμόσιν οίκοδομήσοντας. (8) πάντα τά πλοΐα οίκοι ήν ποιητέα. (9) τοΰτο δέ λέγειν ψεύδεσθαί έστι και μεταφορας λέγειν ποιητικάς. (ίο) φοβούμεθα τά τε βλάπτοντα και τά βλάψοντα. 1 9 3 . ( ι ι ) D i d he love his wife a n d c h i l d r e n ?
(12) I t seemed best to
t h e m all n o t to show the ships to those on the island. he bring the philosopher to see the horses run ? to h i m to be divine.
(15) H e asked this of all those w h o were at home.
(16) T h e builders were asking him for timber. w e all m a r c h e d off homewards. irom home ? do.
(13) W h y did
(14) Her p o e t r y seemed (17) F r o m this place
(18) W h a t did he ask of the people
(19) W h a t she has done, s o m e b o d y else will s o m e t i m e
(20) In e v e r y art it is necessary to h a v e suitable instruments.
XXVII. Personal,
Reflexive,
and Reciprocal
PRONOUNS Pronouns;
εις, ουδείς, μηδείς;
Double
Negatives Ού πολλά άλλά πολύ. Τνώμη αδέσποτος. Not many things but much.
1 9 4 . The personal pronouns are εγώ I, σύ thou, and, strictly speaking, ού (gen.) of him, of her, of it. L e a r n the inflections of these words (426, 428: unaccented forms are enclitic and unemphatic). In A t t i c prose o5 is used, not as a personal pronoun, but as an indirect reflexive, i.e. as a r e f l e x i v e standing in a dependent clause b u t referring to the s u b j e c t of the m a i n v e r b : έβούλετό οί τώ παΐδε παρεΐναι he wanted his two sons to be by him. In place of a personal pronoun of the third person A t t i c Greek uses αύτοϋ (155.3) * n the oblique cases, a demonstrative pronoun (ούτος, αδε, or εκείνος) in the nominative. Possessive genitives of the personal p r o n o u n s and of αύτοΰ take predicate position: 6 πατήρ έμοΰ my father, ή μήτηρ αυτής her mother. (Cf. 159.2.) 195. The reflexive pronouns are έμαυτοΰ of myself, σεαυτοΰ of thyself, έαυτου of himself. These are generally direct, sometimes indirect: od πολϊτεΐαι λύονται έξ εαυτών constitutions are overthrown from within; άποκτενεις σεαυτόν you will kill yourself; έπεισε ν Αθηναίους εαυτόν κατάγειν he persuaded the Athenians to restore him. W h e n , as in this last sentence, έαυτου is indirect, there is the same possibility of a m b i g u i t y as with the Latin se. Possessive genitives of the reflexive pronouns t a k e a t t r i b u t i v e position. L e a r n the inflections of these words (427). 196. T h e reciprocal pronoun is άλλήλων of each other. Possessive g e n i t i v e s of the reciprocal pronoun t a k e attributive position. L e a r n the inflection (429). 197. In εις one and in ούδείς and μηδείς not one, nobody the accent of the feminine is irregular in genitive and dative. L e a r n the inflections of these words (423).
92
AN 198.
Two
negatives
do not m a k e
s i m p l e : ουδέν δ τ ι ού φανερόν there ούδένα I dont
see
anyone',
199.
not urge
a f f i r m a t i v e unless the second
nothing him not to
that
is not
visible;
do I see anyone;
(1)
πολιτεία,
ο ύ π ω φαίνεται τυραννίδος
is
ορώ
ουκ έ κ έ -
come.
δτε (rel. p r o n o m . a d v . ) , when (298- 299). ότέ (indef. p r o n o m . a d v . ) , sometimes. ©\>, d a t . ol (pers. pron. used as indir. r e f l e x . ) , of himself, of herself, of itself, L a t . sin. ουδείς, ουδεμία, ουδέν [ούδέ + εις], not one, nobody. π ά σ χ ω (πενθ, πονθ, παθ; in πάθ-σκω, w h e n t h e 0 d i s a p p e a r s b e f o r e σ [360], t h e a s p i r a t i o n is t r a n s f e r r e d to t h e κ), πείσομαι (πενθ-σ-ο-μαι), έπαθον, πεπονθα [πάθος], experience, suffer, PATIOR; κακώς πάσχω, be badly treated. πολιτεία, ας, ή [πολίτης], citizenship, government, form of government, p o l ity, constitution. σεαυτοΰ, ής (reflex, p r o n . ) , of thy self. σπέρμα, ατος, τό, seed, s p e r m , σύ, σοϋ (pers. p r o n . ) , THOU, L a t . TU. φ α ί ν ω (φαν: 477), φανώ (105, 443), εφηνα (444)' πέφαγκα (have shown) and πέφηνα {have appeared: 93), πέφασμαι (448), έφάνθην or έφάνην [φανερός, phenomenon, diaphanous], bring to light, show, mid., appear (with inf. in indir. disc.), be plainly (with p t c . in indir. disc.). (gen. of c o m p a r . )
διαφέρουσα αύτη
(3) τ α ύ τ α π ά σ χ ε ι ν ο ύ τ ε σ ύ δ υ ν ή σ ε ι ο υ τ ' ά λ λ ο ς ό σ τ ι σ ο ύ ν .
(4) ού γ ά ρ β ο υ λ ή -
(5) ά μ α δ' α λ λ ή λ ο υ ς ε ϊ δ ο ν οί τ α ύ τ α π α θ ό ν τ ε ς .
τ α ΰ τ ' ούδεις ού δ υ ν ή σ ε τ α ι δ η λ ώ σ α ι .
(y)
σουσί με μετά σφών ϋ μ ά ς άδικεΐν.
(8) δια τ ί σ ε α υ τ ό ν ού φ ι λ ε ΐ ς ;
άνήρ ουδείς άνήρ.
(ιι)
nobody'').
ή
(2) τ ί μέν ούν ε σ τ ί τ ό σ π έ ρ μ α , κ α ι έκ τ ί ν ο ς γ ί γ ν ε τ α ι , δ ή λ ό ν έ σ τ ι ν .
σομαι έμαυτόν βλάπτειν.
201.
ούχ
VOCABULARY
ά λ λ ή λ ω ν , ων, ων [parallel] (reciprocal p r o n . ) , of one another, of each other. δια-ψέρω, difvKR, difimR from, surpass (with gen. of c o m p a r . ) . δύναμαι, δυνήσομαι, δεδύνημαι, έδυνήθην, be able, can, amount to (pres. i n f l e c t e d like ΐσταμαι [460] e x c e p t t h a t subj u n c t i v e s a n d o p t a t i v e s h a v e recessive a c c e n t [as if t h e r e w e r e n o c o n t r a c t i o n ] : δύνωμαι, δύναιτο); δυνατός, ή, όν (verbal a d j . ) , powerful, able, possible. δύναμις, εως, ή [ d y n a m i c , dynamite], power, faculty, potentiality, POTENTIA. εαυτοϋ, ής, οΰ (reflex, p r o n . ) , of himself, of herself, of itself. Ι γ ώ , έμοϋ [ME] (pers. p r o n . ) , 1, L a t . EGO ; £γωγε, Ι at least, 1 for my part. εις, μία, εν, one. έμαυτου, ής (reflex, p r o n . ) , of MYself. έτερος, ά, ov [ h e t e r o g e n e o u s ] (dem. p r o n o m . a d j . ) , other (with gen. of c o m p a r . ) , another, the other; one of two·, έτέρως (adv.), in one or the other way. μηδείς, μηδεμία, μηδέν [μηδέ + είς], not one, nobody. 200.
an is
ούδ' ο ρ ώ ούδένα nor
λ ε υ σ ε ν α υ τ ό ν μ ή έ λ θ ε ΐ ν he did
93
INTRODUCTION
(ίο)
(g)
εις
ότέ μέν ύ π ό τ ο ϋ ε τ έ ρ ο υ κ α κ ώ ς ε π α σ χ ε ν , ότέ δ' ευ.
H e persuaded the others not to slander a n y b o d y ("to
slander
(12) W h e n y o u w e r e d e l a y i n g , w e w e r e d e l a y i n g t o o
we were delaying").
(6)
οί γ ά ρ τ ο ι ς σ ώ μ α σ ι δ υ ν α τ ο ί κ ε λ ε ύ -
(13) D o y o u s a y t h a t y o u also ( " a l s o y o u " )
("also have
94
PHILOSOPHICAL
sufficient power ?
GREEK
(14) H e himself will urge us to trust him.
(15}
N o b o d y will be able to say that I a m deceiving either myself or y o u (use double neg.). another.
(16) Because of this t h e y will all differ from one
(17) i s she speaking to herself?
light b y those w h o h a d injured u s ? amount to ? else.
(18) W a s this brought to-
(19) W h a t does all this p o w e r
(20) Sometimes he ran to you, and sometimes to someone
XXVIII. THE THIRD DECLENSION Adjectives
of Third and First
Declension;
Adjectives
of Third
Declension
Σοφώ γάρ αισχρού έξαμαρτάνειν. Έ κ του Αισχύλου Προμηθέως Δεσμώτου 1039· It is shameful for a wise man to make mistakes.
2 0 2 . I n a d j e c t i v e s of t h e t h i r d a n d first declensions
the
masculine
a n d t h e n e u t e r are i n f l e c t e d in t h e t h i r d declension a n d t h e f e m i n i n e is i n f l e c t e d like θάλαττα or βασίλεια or πείρα (55, 6 i ) . L e a r n the inflection of μέλας a n d ηδύς
(406-407); n o t e t h a t
in the m a s c u l i n e plural t h e
n o m i n a t i v e ήδεΐς is used for the a c c u s a t i v e . 2 0 3 . I n a d j e c t i v e s of t h e third declension the masculine a n d the f e m i n i n e are alike. L e a r n the i n f l e c t i o n of αληθής a n d εύδαίμων (408-409); n o t e t h a t , in t h e masculine a n d feminine plural, the n o m i n a t i v e αληθείς is used f o r the a c c u s a t i v e . 2 0 4 . L e a r n t h e i n f l e c t i o n of the irregular a d j e c t i v e s μέγας a n d πολύς (4io).
205.
VOCABULARY ευδαίμων, εΰδαιμον [εύ + δαίμων], prosperous, happy. ηδομαι, ήσθήσομαι, ήσθην, be pleased (with dat. of cause o r w i t h s u p p l e m . ptc.).
ά - b e f o r e c o n s o n a n t , άν- before v o w e l ( " a l p h a p r i v a t i v e " ) , UN-, L a t . IN-. άληθής, ές [ά + ληθ of λανθάνω], true; αληθώς (adv.), truly; ώς άληθώς, in very truth. ώ ν ω [ a d v . of άνά], up, upwards, aloft. β α θ ύ ς , εΐα, ύ [βάθος depth, b a t h o s ] , deep. γιγνώσκω (γνω, γνο: g8.-2, 479), γνώσομαι, εγνων (465)1 εγνωκα, εγνωσμαι, έγνώσθην [γνώμη, gnostic, KEN, CAN], come
to
KNOW,
KNOW,
Lat.
ηδονή, ής, ή [hedonism], pleasure. ήδυνω (ήδυν: 477), ήδϋνα, ήδυσμαι, ήδύνθην [ήδύς], make pleasant, season. ηδύς, εΐα, ύ [σ,Ραδ; ηδομαι, s u A v i s f o r SUADVIS],
recoGNiSE t h a t s o m e t h i n g is (with p t c . i n indir, disc.), decide t h a t s o m e t h i n g is (with inf. in indir. disc.),
γλυκύς, εΐα, ύ [glycerine], sweet. γυώσις, εως, ή [γιγνώσκω, diagnosis], inquiry,
pleasant,
SWEET.
κ ά τ ω (adv. of κατά), down, downwards, below. μ έ γ α ς , μεγάλη, μέγα [ m e g a l o m a n i a , MUCH], great, large, tall, L a t . MAGNUS; μέγα (acc. as a d v . ) , greatly. μ ε λ ά ς , μέλαινα, μέλαν [ m e l a n c h o l y ] , black.
NOSCO,
KNOWLEDGE.
95
72
PHILOSOPHICAL
πλήθος,
ους,
τό
[πλήρης,
plethora]
(the noun corresponding to πολύς), multitude, tude.
plurality,
•πλήρης, ες [πλήθος,
quantity,
magni-
PLENTY], FULL,
Lat.
PLENUS.
πολλάκις [πολύς] (adv.), many times, often.
GREEK
πολλαχώς ways or
[πολύς] senses.
(adv.),
in
many
πολύς, πολλή, πολύ [polygon],
much,
many, οί πολλοί, the many, the greater number·, ώς έπί τό πολύ, for the most
part·, πολύ (acc. as adv.), much. ψευδής,
ες
[ψεΰδος],
lying,
false;
ψευδώς (adv.), falsely.
2 0 6 . (l) τό αληθές και τδ ψεΰδος έν τώ αύτώ 1 γένει έστί τώ άγαθώ και κακώ. (2) έ'γνωκα ήπατημένη και της χάριτος έκβεβλημένη (172.3b). (3) επει δ' ού ταύτο πασιν ήδύ κατά φύσιν αλλ' έτερα έτέροις, και αυτών τών θηρίων οί βίοι προς άλλήλους διαφέρουσιν. (4) του οφθαλμού τό μέσον μέλαν φαίνεται. (5) άμα δέ ταύτη τή γνώσει γίγνεται ώς έπί τό πολύ ηδονή τις. (6) τω ε'ίδει (328.1b) διαφέρουσιν αί ήδοναί- ετεραι γάρ αί άπό τών καλών και άπό τών κακών, και ούκ εστίν ήσθήναι τήν του δικαίου ήδονήν μή οντα δίκαιον. (7) ούκ έστιν άρα τό μέγα τώ μΐκρώ εναντίον, ούδέ τό πολύ τω όλίγω. (8) άνω μεν φέρεται τό πυρ, κάτω δ' οι τε λίθοι και άλλα πολλά. (g) άλλά δει τήν πόλιν, πλήθος οδσαν, μίαν ποιεΐν. (ίο) άναγκαΐον γάρ έστιν χρόνφ ποτέ (at last) έκ τών ψευδών άγαθών αληθές γίγνεσθαι κακόν. 2 0 7 . ( ι ι ) Men and gods are said t o be h a p p y , b u t none of the other creatures is. (12) Some foods ("some of the foods") are sweet and some [are] not. (13) A l l the region a b o v e is full of t h a t b o d y . (14) T h e y say t h a t this word is used ( " s a i d " ) in m a n y senses. (15) T h e i r story w a s plainly false (φαίνομαι 172.3b). (16) She will e n j o y this inquiry. (17) T o know her w a s to love her, (18) H a p p y the m a n w h o has not ill-treated others! (172.1). (19) T h e poets say the daughters of the gods are tall and fair. (20) She can b o t h false and friendly be. ι. Adjectives meaning same or similar may be followed by dat.
XXIX. Comparison
of Adjectives;
ADJECTIVES
Formation
and Comparison
of
Adverbs
"Αριστον μέν ύδωρ. Πινδάρου Όλυμπιονίκαις i. ι . Water is best.
2 0 8 , In most a d j e c t i v e s the comparative and superlative are formed b y adding τερος, τερά, τερον and τατος, τατη, τατον to the masculine stem of the positive; in adjectives ending in ος and h a v i n g in the penult a short v o w e l not followed b y t w o consonants, the final ο of the stem is lengthened to ω : δήλος (δηλο) πικρός (πικρό) κενός (κενΓο) σοφός (σοφο) αληθής (άληθεσ) βραχύς (βραχύ) μέλας (μελαν)
δηλότερος
δηλότατος
πικρότερος
πικρότατος
κενότερος
κενότατος
σοφώτερος άληθέστερος
σοφώτατος αληθέστατος
βραχύτερος μελάντερος
βραχύτατος μελάντατος
Κ I n adjectives ending in ων the comparative and superlative are formed b y adding εστερος, εστερά, εστερον and εστατος, εστατη, εστατον to the stem of the positive: εύδαίμων (εύδαιμον) prosperous
εύδαιμονέστερος
εύδαιμονέστατος
2 1 0 . I n a s o m e w h a t similar w a y some adjectives ending in οος (contracted to ους) substitute εστερος, εστερά, εστερον a n d εστατος, εστατη, εστατον for the final ο of the s t e m : άπλους (άπλοο) simple
άπλούστερος (for άπλο-εστερος)
απλούστατος (for άπλο-εστατος)
.. In some adjectives, chiefly those in ~υς or -ρος, the c o m p a r a t i v e and superlative are formed b y adding ίων, ϊον and ιστός, ιστη, ιστον to the root which lies b a c k of the positive: ηδύς (ήδ of ήδομαι) pleasant
ήδΐων
ήδιστος
beautiful
καλλίων
κάλλιστος
αισχρός (αίσχ of αίσχος, τό, shame) shameful
αίσχίων
α'ίσχιστος
καλός (καλλ of κάλλος, τό, beauty)
97
72
PHILOSOPHICAL
GREEK
212. T h e following common a d j e c t i v e s are irregular in comparison: άγαθός good,
brave
άμείνων
άριστος
βελτίων
βέλτιστος κράτιστος
κρείττων κακός bad,
κακίων
cowardly
κάκιστος
(211)
χείριστος worst (ήκιστα [adv.]
χειρών worse ήττων
(2ΐΐ)
inferior
least) μέγας great
μείζων (for μεγ^Των)
μικρός small
μικρότερος (2θ8)
μέγιστος μικρότατος
έλάττων (έλάττων)
ελάχιστος όλίγιστος
ολίγος little, few πολύς much,
many
ταχύς (θαχυς: 3^7) swift, φίλος friendly
quick
πλείων or πλέων θάττων (for θαχyωv) φιλαίτερος
(2θ8)
ελάχιστος πλείστος τάχιστος φιλαίτατος φίλτατος
2 1 3 . A n y adjective m a y be compared b y means of the adverbs μάλλον more and μάλιστα most; participles and most v e r b a l a d j e c t i v e s are regularly thus c o m p a r e d : φίλος friendly
μάλλον φίλος
μάλιστα φίλος
ήδικημένος wronged
μάλλον ήδικημένος
μάλιστα ήδικημένος
κινητός movable
μάλλον κινητός
μάλιστα
κινητός
214. Learn the inflection of άπλους (403) and of ήδΐων (409). 215. A d v e r b s of manner m a y be formed f r o m positives b y substituting ς for the final ν of the genitive plural masculine. T h e c o m p a r a t i v e of the a d v e r b is the accusative singular neuter of the c o m p a r a t i v e a d j e c t i v e . T h e superlative of the a d v e r b is the accusative plural neuter of the superlative adjective. σοφώς εύδαιμόνως άπλώς ήδέως ταχέως
σοφώτερον
σοφώτατα
εύδαιμονέστερον
εύδαιμονέστατα
άπλούστερον
απλούστατα
ήδΐον
ήδιστα
θάττον
AN
99
INTRODUCTION
2 1 6 » T h e c o m p a r a t i v e m a y b e f o l l o w e d b y t h e g e n i t i v e of c o m p a r i s o n or b y ή than
( w i t h t h e s a m e c a s e a f t e r it a s b e f o r e i t ) ; cf. L a t i n
o f c o m p a r i s o n a n d quam.
ablative
D e g r e e of d i f f e r e n c e is i n d i c a t e d b y a n
adverb
-or b y t h e d a t i v e o f m a n n e r : π ο λ ύ μ ε ί ζ ω ν o r π ο λ λ ω μ ε ί ζ ω ν much As
in
Latin,
without plain,
both
implying
the a
comparative
distinct
δ η λ ό τ α τ ο ς very
and
the superlative
comparison:
δηλότερος
too
greater.
may plain
be
used fairly
or
plain.
217.
VOCABULARY
αισχρός, δ, όν [αίσχος shame], shameful, ugly. C o m p a r . αισχίων, superl. αϊσχιστος. άπλοϋς,
ή,
οΰν
[SIMPLEX,
ONEFOLD],
SIMPLE (403, 2 1 0 ) ; άπλώς (adv.), SIMPLY, absolutely, without qualification. βραχύς, εΐα, ύ [brachylogy], short, BRIEF,
Lat.
BREVIS.
(εΐρω n o t A t t i c ; Fep, Fp-η, 5επ), έρώ, είπον, εϊρηκα, εΐρημαι, έρρήθην [ e p i c , WORD,
Lat.
V E R B U M ] , say
(with
acc.
or w i t h δτι or ώ ς ) ; mention (with a c c . ) ; ώς ειπείν, so to speak, roughly speaking. κενός (κενΓος), ή, όν [ c e n o t a p h ] , empty. C o m p a r . κενότερος, superl. κενότατος, κενόν, οΰ, τό, void. >ίϊνέω, κινήσω, εκίνησα, κεκίνηκα, κεκίνημαι, έκΐνήθην [ c i n e m a ] , move (trans.), set in motion; κινητός, ή, όν ( v e r b a l a d j . ) , movable, changeable. κίνησις, ε ως, ή, in w i d e sense, change (μεταβολή); in n a r r o w sense, motion, MOTUS (excluding g e n e r a t i o n a n d destruction). κινητικός, ή, όν [kinetic], moving, movable.
(1)
218.
άμφω
μάλα (adv.), much; c o m p a r . μάλλον, superl. μάλιστα, ν ο μ ί ζ ω (477), νομιώ (48.4), ένόμισα, νενόμικα, νενόμισμαι, ένομίσθην [νόμος], think, consider (with inf. in indir. disc, or w i t h ώς a n d f i n i t e v b . : 286-204). 010μαL or οΐμαι (οί, οϊη), οίήσομαι, ώήθην, think, suppose (with inf. in indir. disc, or w i t h ώς a n d finite v b . : 286-294). πικρός, ά., όν [ p i c r i c ] , sharp, bitter, harsh. στενός (στενΡος), ή, όν [ s t e n o g r a p h y ] , narrow (399). C o m p a r . στενότερος, superl. στενότατος, συγγενής, ές [σύν + γένος], related, ΑΚΊΝ. τ α χ ύ ς (θαχυς), εΐα, ύ [ t a c h y g r a p h y ] , swift; τάχα (adv.), quickly, perhaps. τέλειος, α, ον (or ος, ον) [τέλος], perfect, complete, final. τελειόω, τελειώσω, έτελείωσα, τετελείωκα, τετελείωμαι, έτελειώθην, make perfect (τέλειος), complete. τελευταίος ά, ον [τελευτή], last. τελευτή, ής, ή [τέλος], completion, end. τέλος, ους, τό [ t e l e o l o g y ] , completion, end, FINIS; δια τέλους, continuously, τέλος (adv.), finally.
( n o m . ) δή κ ΐ ν ο ΰ σ ι , και τό τελευταΖον και το πρώτον,
άλλα
μ ά λ λ ο ν τ ό π ρ ώ τ ο ν - ε κ ε ί ν ο γ α ρ κ ϊ ν ε ϊ τ ό τ ε λ ε υ τ α ΐ ο ν , ά λ λ ' ού τ ο ύ τ ο τ ό π ρ ώ τ ο ν . (2) δ ο κ ε ΐ γ α ρ ε ί ν α ι κ ε ν ό ν ό α ή ρ , ο δ τ ο ς δ' ε σ τ ί ν ό π ο ι ώ ν ά κ ο ύ ε ι ν , ό τ α ν κ ΐ ν η θ ή . (3) τ ά ς
φλέβας ταύτας
Οϋμός.
(5) εί δ' ε σ τ ί ν , ώ σ π ε ρ ε'ίρηται, τ ά μεν κ α τ ' ά λ ή θ ε ι α ν α ι σ χ ρ ά τ ά
κατά
δόξαν,
λίθους.
(7)
ουδέν
στενοτάτας
διαφέρει.
ένόμιζεν.
(6) κ ι ν η τ ο ύ ς
ο λόγος ήμΐν της φύσεως τέλος.
(4) π ι κ ρ ό ς ωετο
είναι
τύραννος
και
τούς
εστίν
ό δέ
μέγιστους
(8) τ ο ύ τ ω σ υ γ γ ε ν έ σ τ α τ ο ς έ σ τ ι ν
PHILOSOPHICAL
100
ό σοφός.
GREEK
(9) τάχα δ' ούδέ έόράκας εύδαιμονεστέρους άνθρώπους των
άρετή ήδομένων,
(ίο) κατά πάσαν γάρ α'ί'σθησίν εστίν ηδονή, ήδίστη
τή δ5
ή
τελειότατη. 2 1 9 . ( ι ι ) T h e pleasure completes the a c t i v i t y .
(12) T h e y thought t h a t
swift motions (use generic article) were b o t h brief and simple.
(13)
A n end (τελευτή) is t h a t w h i c h is itself n a t u r a l l y (φάω) after something. (14) D o y o u consider this wine sweeter than t h a t ? (15) I t is plain t h a t the time is rather short.
(16) T h a t which is e m p t y
seems to be something, b u t is nothing.
w o u l d (234.2) t r e a t his own relatives b a d l y ? narrower t h a n the short road. moved. false.
("the
empty")
(17) D o y o u think t h a t he (18) T h e river is even
(19) W e said t h a t nothing h a d been
(20) W h a t y o u said w a s v e r y true, b u t w h a t y o u t h o u g h t w a s
XXXII. Ω-VERBS Subjunctive Α ν ά γ κ η δ' ούδε θεο^ μάχονται. Σιμωνίδης 5· 2 Ι · Not even the gods fight against cessity.
ne-
2 2 0 . T h e s u b j u n c t i v e is f o u n d in only three tenses: present, aorist, and perfect. I n the present the t h e m a t i c vowel is lengthened to η /ω. In the first aorist active and middle and in the perfect active the α of the tense sign is supplanted b y the long v o w e l η /ω. In the aorist passive the ε of the tense sign is contracted w i t h the long v o w e l η /ω. O n l y in the aorist does the s u b j u n c t i v e passive differ from the s u b j u n c t i v e middle (147). In the perfect active a periphrastic form πεπαιδευκώς ώ, etc., is m u c h commoner t h a n the simple form. A l l s u b j u n c t i v e s have p r i m a r y endings; in the aorist s u b j u n c t i v e passive, as in the aorist indicative passive {147), the endings are active. Learn the inflection of the s u b j u n c t i v e of παιδεύω active, middle, and passive (436, 438-440, 442). 221. N o t e that (1} T h e thematic v o w e l (32) is 71 /ω (cf. 34). (2) In the first aorist passive the tense sign is θε, in the second aorist passive ε (cf. 147, 170). 2 2 2 . A l l three tenses of the subjunctive refer to an action or state as f u t u r e : the present tense to continued or repeated action, the aorist tense to simple occurrence, the perfect tense to action completed (with permanent result). T h e negative is μή. 2 2 3 . T h e independent s u b j u n c t i v e is used in (1) E x h o r t a t i o n s : ταΰτα (μή) \ ( ief ( ποιήσωμεν ^
us
(not) < ^^ ( αυ
( this. ^
(2) Prohibitions: μή ποιήσης ταΰτα do not do this (always aorist). (Prohibitions of continued actions are expressed b y μή and the present i m p e r a t i v e : 257.) 101
72
PHILOSOPHICAL
(3) Q u e s t i o n s a d d r e s s e d and
expressing
shall
we
to
GREEK
oneself or to
deliberation
or
another
doubt:
ποιωμεν;
τί
what
ποιήσωμεν
do ? VOCABULARY
αίρέω (αίρε, έλ), αίρήσω, εΐλον, ήρηκα, ήρημαι, ήρέθην [ h e r e s y ] , take., seize, catch; m i d . , take for oneself, choose; pass., fee chosen (for be taken t h e u s u a l w o r d is άλίσκομαι); αιρετός, ή, όν ( v e r b a l a d j . ) , that may be taken, that may be chosen, chosen, eligible. αιτία, άς, ή [ a e t i o l o g i c a l ] , responsibility, blame, cause, CAUSA. αίτιος, α, ov, responsible; responsible for (with g e n . ) ; αίτιον, ου, τό, cause. άλίσκομαι (άλ, άλω, άλο: 479) ι άλώσομαι, έάλων or ήλων (69, 4 ^ 5 : άλω, άλοίην, άλώναι, άλούς), έάλωκα or ήλωκα, be taken, be seized, be perceived (with p t c . n o t in indir. disc, or w i t h p t c . in indir. disc.), be convicted. (For take see αίρέω.) Ανάγκη, ης, ή, constraint, distress, necessity, NECESSITAS. άψ-αψέω [aphaeresis], take away (with acc. of t h i n g ) , take . . . from (with acc. of t h i n g a n d gen. of pers.). δι-αιρέω, take apart, divide, distinguish·, διαιρετός, ή, όν (verbal a d j . ) , 225.
(ΐ)
τίνος. έστιν.
ο ύ χ ο ύ τ ω φ α ί ν ε τ α ι κ ϊ ν ε ϊ ν ή ψ ϋ χ ή .τό ζ ώ ο ν , α λ λ ά δ ι α
προαιρέσεως
(2) φανερόν δ ή έ κ τ ω ν ε ί ρ η μ έ ν ω ν ο τ ι τ ό έ ξ ά ν ά γ κ η ς δν κατ* έ ν έ ρ γ ε ι ά ν (3) εθει
(4) ή
δ' ή θ ι κ ή
τούτο
τό
εστίν άρετή
γένος.
ο ύ σ ί ά έ σ τ ί ν - ούδέν βοΰς.
capable of being taken apart, taken apart, divisible, divided. διαίρεσις, εως, ή, division, diaeresis, διό (δια δ), wherefore. «ίβνος, ους, τό [ e t h n o l o g y ] , nation, tribe. έθος, ους, τό [έθω], custom, habit. (έθιο n o t A t t i c ) , 2d p f . εΐωΟα (with pres. sense), be accustomed (with inf.). ήθικός, ή, όν [ήθος, ethics], moral, showing moral character·, ΉΘικά Ν ϊ κ ο μάχεια, E t h i c a Nicomacliea. ήθος, ους, τό, haunt, custom, moral character. ούσίδ, άς, ή [όντ, s t e m of pres. p t c . of είμί], being, substance, ESSENCE, SUBSTANTIA, ESSENTIA, ENS. προαίρεσις, εως, ή [προαιρέομαι], choice, purpose. π ρ ο α ι ρ ε τ ι κ ό ς , ή, όν, deliberately choosing, purposive. τέτταρες, Α [tetragon], FOUR (423). φρόνησις, εως, ή [φρήν], practical wisdom, prudence. φρόνιμος, ov [φρήν], prudent.
(y)
δσα εξ
(acc.)
έ'θους
(6) τ ω ν
δια
τό
γίγνεται.
δέ π ρ ώ τ ω ν
πολλάκις (5)
ούσιών
διό
πεποιηκέναι εις
ουδέν
δέκα
μάλλον
( a d v . ) γάρ μάλλον 6 τις άνθρωπος ούσίά ή
α ν ά γ κ η τ ή ν φρόνησιν έ ξ ι ν ε ί ν α ι μ ε τ ά λ ό γ ο υ ά λ η θ ή .
είσιν αί α ί τ ί α ι - ή υ λ η , τ ό ε ί δ ο ς , τ ό κ ΐ ν ή σ α ν , τ ό τ έ λ ο ς ,
ποιούσιν.
είδη
διήρηται
έτερον
έτέρου
(than) (δ)
6 τις
τέτταρές
(g) δ ο κ ε ϊ δ ή φ ρ ο ν ί μ ο υ
ε ί ν α ι τ ό δύνασθαι κ α λ ώ ς β ο υ λ ε ύ σ α σ θ α ι π ε ρ ί τ ά α ύ τ φ α γ α θ ά , ού κ α τ ά
μέρος,
οίον τ ί ν α π ρ ο ς ύ γ ί ε ι α ν , ά λ λ ά τ ί ν α π ρ ο ς τ ό εύ ζ ή ν .
άρετή
ε ξ ι ς π ρ ο α ι ρ ε τ ι κ ή , έν μ ε σ ό τ η τ ι οδσα τ ή π ρ ο ς (relative
(ίο)
ε σ τ ί ν άρα ή
to) η μ ά ς , ώ ρ ι σ μ έ ν η λ ό γ ω ,
κ α ι ώ ς οί φρόνιμοι ό ρ ί ζ ο υ σ ι ν . 226. the
(ιι)
L e t u s s a y , t h e n , a s h a s b e e n s a i d i n t h e Ethics,
virtues
nor
the
vices
are
passions.
(12)
Moral
that
character
neither comes
AN
INTRODUCTION
IO3
(γόγνομαι) f r o m habit. (13) D o not act c o n t r a r y t o y o u r own character. (14) T h e y were t a k i n g a w a y the possessions of the multitude. (15) Shall we say, then, t h a t these things do not a d m i t of (έχω) a n y perceptible division ? (Use double neg.). (16) W e are not accustomed t o injure either the small nations or the large. (Use double neg.). (17) W h y did t h e y not choose to divide their property ? (18) H e will be captured b y his own leader. (19) W e do not wish t o be responsible for this. (20) D o not suppose t h a t it is necessary for y o u yourself t o seize those who are responsible.
XXXII. Ω-VERBS Subjunctive
(Concl.) 'Ιερόν ΰπνον κ οιμαται· θνήσκειν μή λέγε τούς αγαθούς
